Quarterlytics / Publishing / The Quarto Group

The Quarto Group

qrt · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker qrt
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Publishing
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2016 Annual Report · The Quarto Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual Report 2016

T

h

e

Q

u

a

r

t

o

G

r

o

u

p

,

I

n

c

.

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

6

 
 
 
 
 
 
Duboko u šumi stoji malena drvena  

kućica s devet krasnih prozora  

i crvenim ulaznim vratima.

Kad jedan mišić zaključi da će to biti savršen dom,  

dođu i ostale šumske životinje – pa i veliki medo!  

No, hoće li medo uspjeti popraviti stvar  

kad se njihova kuća treskom sruši?

Prelijepe ilustracije povest će vas u raskošan  

bajkovit svijet ruske narodne priče.

Prvi put objavila kuća Frances Lincoln Children’s Books 2015. u Velikoj Britaniji 

Biblioteka Dodo

Naslov originala Deep in the Woods

Copyright © Frances Lincoln Children’s Books, 2015.

Ilustracije copyright © Christopher Corr, 2015.

www.frenceslincoln.com

Prevela i uredila Nataša Ozmec

Grafičko oblikovanje hrvatskog izdanja Ermego d.o.o.

Nakladnik Planetopija

Za nakladnika Marina Kralj Vidačak

Para a criativa chef vegetariana Natasha Corrett e a nutricionista Vicki Edgson,  

kolovoz 2016.

uma dieta equilibrada deve ser baseada nos alimentos alcalinos, pois eles ajudam  

Tiskano u Kini.

Sva prava pridržana.

a manter o pH natural do corpo e facilitam a digestão e a absorção de nutrientes.  

CIP zapis je dostupan u računalnome katalogu Nacionalne  

Neste livro, elas ensinam mais de 100 receitas de dar água na boca, inseridas numa 

i sveučilišne knjižnice u Zagrebu pod brojem 000930911.

abordagem holística de saúde, para todas as refeições – do café da manhã à ceia.

ISBN 978-953-257-343-5

 As autoras explicam como iniciar a reeducação alimentar; trazem um quadro 

com o índice de alcalinidade dos principais ingredientes; orientam sobre os grupos 

alimentares e como balanceá-los; e sugerem atitudes para facilitar a incorporação 

de novos hábitos ao cotidiano. Mostram ainda como colocar em prática a dieta com 

pratos deliciosos, como a Sopa de tomate, coco e pimenta; a Salada de beterraba, 

9 789532 573435

alho assado e quinoa com feta; a Fritada de batata-doce com endro; 

95,00 kn

e o Sorvete de banana crocante, entre outros.

V

i

c

k

i

E

d

g

s

o

n

N

a

t

a

s

h

a

C

o

r

r

e

t

t

A

l

i

m

e

o

b

e

Duboko  

PLUS DE 

100 INFOGRAPHIES 

POUR COMPRENDRE

LES MYSTÈRES 

DE L’UNIVERS

C

h

r

i

s

t

o

p

h

e

r

C

o

r

r

D
u
b
o
k
o

u

š
u
m

i

Les incroyables progrès technologiques 
des dernières décennies nous permettent d’avoir 
enfin un aperçu réel de ce qu’est l’Univers, de sa pro-
digieuse complexité, de ses phénomènes époustouflants se 
produisant  à  des  échelles  presque  inimaginables  et,  plus  que 
tout, de sa beauté à couper le souffle. 

Mais  comment  appréhender  des  données  qui  se  mesurent  en 
années-lumière ? Comment comprendre le processus de la mort d’une 
étoile ? Comment visualiser ce qu’est un trou noir, une exoplanète ou 
une supernova ? Comment se faire une idée de la probabilité d’une vie 
extraterrestre aux confins de la Voie lactée ?

Grâce  à  une  approche  unique,  ce  livre,  élaboré  par  deux 
astrophysiciens, offre une perspective nouvelle sur les 
découvertes  les  plus  récentes  et  l’histoire  de  la 

conquête spatiale.

Narodna   

priča

u šumi

E

W
O
L

T
R
A
U
T
S

H

T

R
O
N

S
I
R
H
C

&

S
O
M
S
O
C

C  SM  S

DÉCOUVRIR L’ESPACE  

EN INFOGRAPHIES

Alimentos para  
o bem-estar

Restabeleça o equilíbrio e melhore  
a saúde com a dieta alcalina

ISBN : 978-2-7114-2403-0

www.vigot.fr

CONTENTS

T
O
G
V

I

Natasha Corrett
Vicki Edgson

H
RT
O

STUART LOWE & CHRIS N

VIGOT

t

-

e

o

n

m

Möt några av naturens 
mest äventyrliga djur på 
denna upptäcktsfärd  
i naturens värld.

p

a

a

a

s

s

r

r

t

Utforska SJU VÄRLDSDELSKARTOR och lär känna djur  
som lever och överlever på spektakulära vis genom årets  
alla växlingar. I den här boken får du färdas med NARVALAR  
på deras riskfyllda turer i jakt på mat under isen, uppfostra  
ORANGUTANGUNGAR i Borneo, klättra i bergen med  
Kinas JÄTTEPANDOR och uppleva många andra  
mäktiga DJURÄVENTYR från jordens alla hörn. 

Här finns fler än 30 spännande djur, så unga 
naturäventyrare kan upptäcka hundratals roliga 
saker och nya fakta på varje sida i boken.

Deep In TheWoods_PLC

Size: W462mm X H306mm (15mm bleed)_ISO39L

DeepintheWoods - CasedCover_CRO.indd   1

ISBN  978-85-7914-519-3

HH JACKET FINAL BRA 2.indd   1

Atlas of Animals_CVR_SWE.indd   1

Tauch ein in die Natur und entdecke  
zehn der artenreichsten Lebensräume der Erde –  
kunstvoll gestaltet vom Mailänder Designduo Carnovsky.

Die beiliegende magische Farbzauberlupe macht die fantastischen 

Lebenswelten des Dschungels, der Ozeane, der Steppen und Wälder  

sichtbar: Die Tiere des Tages sind durch die rote Lupe zu erkennen, 

die Tiere der Nacht durch die blaue und die Pflanzen durch die grüne.

Was wird dir auf deiner Reise durch die Wildnis begegnen?

AU105_R2_Fre_PLC_R1        Size:413.5X252mm    Spin:21.5mm

Fotos: Lisa Linder

Christopher
Corr

ATLAS
ATLAS
FÖR
ÄVENTYRARE
ÄVENTYRARE
DJUREN I VÄRLDEN

STRATEGIC REPORT
Highlights  
Quarto at a Glance 
Our Imprints and Philosophy 
A Global Business 
Growth Strategy 
Chairman’s Statement 
Chief Executive Officer’s Statement  
Our Business Model and Strategy 
2016 Portfolio Highlights 
Our Key Performance Indicators  
Risk Management, Principal Risks and Uncertainties 
Financial Review  
Divisional Review 
Our People 
Corporate Responsibility and Sustainability 

1
2
4
6
8
10
12
16
18
20
22
24
30
36
38
Illustrerad av Lucy Letherland
Text av Rachel Williams 
och Emily Hawkins

En samling av naturens mest 
SPEKTAKULÄRA HÄNDELSER, MÄKTIGA 
MIGRATIONER och SÄLLSAMMA 
BETEENDEN

EB320663_GP4B_CYS(1)_D: KHL-HD2
Client : Frances Lincoln

u
s
t
r
e
r
a
d
a
v

2/14/14   4:22 PM

I
l
l

27.4.2016   19:19:28

L
u
c
y
L
e
t
h
e
r
l

a
n
d

GOVERNANCE
Board of Directors 
Nominations Committee Report  
Audit Committee Report  
Remuneration Committee Report  
Annual Report on Remuneration  
Directors’ Report  
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities  
Independent Auditor’s Report  

ISBN 978-91-7663-173-7

9 7 8 9 1 7 6 6 3 1 7 3 7 >

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Consolidated Income Statement 
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income  
Consolidated Balance Sheet  
• Mit  F
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity  
Consolidated Cash Flow Statement  
Notes to the Financial Statements  
Company Balance Sheet  
Company Statement of Changes in Equity 
Notes to the Company Balance Sheet 
Five Year Summary  
Officers and Professional Advisors  

y Magische Welten

von Carnovsky     •     Text von Rachel Williams

C
a
r
n
o
v
s
k

r b zauberlu

a

p

e

•

2016-09-21   11:22

40
42
43
46
55
62
67
69

78
79
80
81
82
83
116
117
118
122
123

M
a
g

i
s
c
h
e

W

e
l
t
e
n

ISBN 978-3-7913-7282-2  

2282731973879

Entdecke  

verborgene 

Lebensräume  

mit der   

Zauberlupe! 

7282_Magische Welten_cov.indd   1

18.05.16   09:56

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HIGHLIGHTS

FINANCIAL

REVENUE  
($M)

PUBLISHING REVENUE  
($M)

ADJUSTED2 PUBLISHING 
OPERATING PROFIT1  
($M)

2016

2015

188.4

182.2

2016

2015

154.6

145.4

2016

20153

21.7

18.5

(LOSS)/PROFIT FOR  
THE YEAR1,3 
($M)

ADJUSTED2 EARNINGS  
PER SHARE (EXCLUDING 
BOOKS & GIFTS DIRECT) 
(CENTS)

BASIC (LOSS)/EARNINGS  
PER SHARE  
(CENTS)

(5.3)

2016

20153

8.5

2016

2015

54.7

(28.5)

2016

46.0

20153

41.3

1 

Includes the contribution from acquired businesses in 2015 and 2016 and a reduced amortisation charge in 2016 arising from the review 
of useful lives of our titles, providing consistency across all imprints in the portfolio. Further details are set out in Note 1 and Note 30. 
2  Adjusted measures are stated before amortisation of acquired intangible assets and other exceptional items. See Note 32 for further 

explanation of these alternative performance measures.

3  Restated for an error in our Books & Gifts Direct business with respect to the valuation of stock in transit at 31 December 2015 and prior 

periods. Further details are set out in Note 1.

OPERATIONAL

•  Resilient  performance  in  publishing  business; 

revenue up 6%, operating profit up 17%.

•  Children’s publishing revenues up 34% with both 

organic and acquisitive growth.

•  Foreign rights revenues up 8% despite currency 

headwinds in certain markets.

•  Positive contribution from acquired businesses in 
2016, Harvard Common Press and becker&mayer.

•  Extended value of backlist confirmed by review 

of useful economic lives of titles.

•  Group  refocused  on  core  publishing  portfolio 
during the course of 2017 with new organisational 
and financial reporting structure.

•  Resignation  of  Group  Chief  Financial  Officer 

Michael Connole.

1

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016QUARTO AT A GLANCE

We are the leading global illustrated non-fiction 
book publisher. We create and own long-lasting 
content to make and sell great books that 
entertain, educate and enrich the lives of adults 
and children around the world.

400+

EMPLOYEES

48

IMPRINTS AND BUSINESSES

10,000

BOOKS IN OUR CATALOGUE

$37M

ANNUAL INTELLECTUAL 
PROPERTY INVESTMENT

58% 

OF ANNUAL SALES  
FROM BACKLIST

40 

YEARS
FOUNDED IN 1976

STRATEGIC PRIORITIES

ORGANIC 
GROWTH

ACQUISITION 
GROWTH

OPERATING 
MODEL 
EFFICIENCIES

INTELLECTUAL 
PROPERTY 
INVESTMENT

DISTRIBUTION 
DEVELOPMENT

 Read more on pages 16-17

2

Strategic ReportEIGHT MAIN PUBLISHING CATEGORIES

BOOKS ON  
FOOD AND DRINK

BOOKS ON  
DESIGN, ART  
AND CRAFT

BOOKS ON BODY, MIND, 
SPIRIT, PARENTING AND 
RELATIONSHIPS

BOOKS ON INTERIORS, 
ARCHITECTURE, DIY,  
PETS AND GARDENING

BOOKS ON  
CARS, TRAINS,  
BOATS, MOTORCYCLES  
AND PLANES

BOOKS ON  
BIOGRAPHY,  
TRAVEL, HISTORY,  
SPACE AND MORE

FUN & IMAGINATIVE 
BOOKS AND KITS  
FOR CHILDREN OF  
ALL AGES

STATIONERY, KITS, 
CALENDARS AND MORE

SIX VALUES

BE  
CONSISTENT

Be clear,  
concise and  
clear-headed. 

BE  
ACCOUNTABLE

Take responsibility 
and do what  
you say. 

BE  
CURIOUS

Try things,  
fail well,  
do it quickly. 

BE  
PURPOSEFUL

Do what you love  
and make  
it happen. 

BE  
EXCELLENT

Quality matters  
in everything  
we do.

BE 
COLLABORATIVE

Use ‘we’ and bring 
the best out in  
each other. 

3

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016OUR IMPRINTS  
AND PHILOSOPHY

Our imprints make up a diversified portfolio that strengthens  
with each addition. They are supported by a central operational  
and financial platform, allowing our creative ecosystem to  
flourish without the distraction of non-core activities.

Suppliers

Sales

Quarto  
Knows

Marketing

Experts

Illustrators

Finance

IT

Freelancers

Publishing  
operations

Board of  
Directors

Platform

Comms

Media

Foreign  
rights sales

Q Partners

Customers

Authors

Legal

People

4

Quarto Children’s BooksStrategic ReportCREATIVITY AT 
OUR VERY CORE

In  1976,  the  founders  of  Quarto  were 
first  publishers  to  make  the 
the 
economics  of  illustrated  books  work, 
by  having  the  books  co-published 
across  different  markets  so 
that  
print  runs  could  be  big  enough  to 
reduce  costs  per  unit.  Quarto  was  
born  from  creativity  and  innovation 
and  40  years  later  that  is  still  in  our 
DNA  as  we  constantly  explore  new  
formats,  new  content  ideas  and  new  
business ventures. 

We  have  been  a  global  leader  in 
illustrated  books  ever  since.  Our  size 
and  scale  have  changed,  but  at  the 
heart  of  what  we  do,  our  mission  
has  not  changed  –  to  make  and  sell 
books  that  entertain,  educate  and 
enrich  the  lives  of  adults  and  children 
around the world. That is what we are 
passionate about. 

Many  issues  that  we  deal  with  every 
day as a business are very important – 
commercial and financial management, 
sourcing,  print  buying,  acquisitions 
and  many  others  –  but  the  creative 
quality  of  our  content  and  books  will 
always be our number one priority. 

Ideas  are  our 
livelihood  and  the 
lifeblood of Quarto. We succeed or fail 
by the ideas we put into our hundreds 
of  books  every  year.  Big  ideas  inspire 
light  on 
they  shine  a 
everyone; 
information that most of us are unable 

to  see.  Having  the  best  ideas  for  our 
imprints and our customers is what will 
make us successful. 

That is why our guiding philosophy has 
always been – and remains – ‘creative 
independence’.  Each  one  of  our  48 
imprints  can  publish  what  they  want. 
We believe that the autonomy given to 
our  people  ensures  that  we  remain 
market-focused  and  relevant  to  our 
readers  and  customers.  Each  imprint 
has  its  own  identity,  its  own  lifecycle, 
and caters for different audiences and 
markets. We work hard to manage our 
intellectual  property  (IP)  investment 
accordingly, consistently and carefully 
– one size does not fit all when it comes 
to creativity. 

In order to be creative, you need to be 
effective.  Our  imprints  are  supported 
by  a  strong  central  platform  that 
includes  finance,  operations,  sales, 
marketing  and  foreign  rights  sales. 
Process  will  never  trump  passion,  but  
it  can  enable  creativity  when  used 
effectively. By removing distractions – 
sharing  common  infrastructure  and 
support  networks,  designing  efficient 
back  office  tools  and  processes,  and 
other  things  that  can  be  managed 
efficiently at a central level – it frees up 
time  and  space  for  our  people  to  be 
more creative, which is what Quarto is 
all about.

5

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016A GLOBAL BUSINESS

Quarto is a global Group that has had  
a strong international focus ever since  
we were founded in 1976.

550+

FOREIGN CO-EDITION 
CUSTOMERS

“Our Foreign Rights team achieved 
a record performance in 2016 with 
$32.5m revenue, an impressive 8% 
increase year-on-year.”

Karine Marko
Group Director of Foreign Rights

Key

 Quarto office
 International partnership
 English language markets
 Foreign language markets

6

Strategic Report2

INTERNATIONAL 
PUBLISHING 
PARTNERSHIPS

“Launching our publishing partnership 
with Kalimat Group to publish and distribute 
books in Arabic in the Middle East and 
North Africa has been a major highlight 
as we continually seek to develop alternative 
models to distribute our books worldwide.”

David Inman
Managing Director, Quarto Partners

11

OFFICES

Quarto Offices
Seattle, USA
California, USA
Minneapolis, USA
Boston, USA
New York, USA
London, UK (x2)
Brighton, UK
Yate, UK
Hong Kong, China
Sydney, Australia

47

FOREIGN LANGUAGE 
MARKETS

7

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016GROWTH STRATEGY

“Our goal is to become the dominant publisher  
of illustrated books worldwide.”

Marcus E. Leaver
Chief Executive

Acquisition Growth
Acquisitive  growth  is  a  key  strategic 
area  for  the  Group.  As  the  market 
leader  with  a  global  and  scalable 
platform 
a 
fragmented  industry,  the  potential 
opportunity is significant. 

in  what 

remains 

When  benchmarking  and  evaluating 
potential acquisition opportunities, we 
go through an exhaustive due diligence 
process  and  only 
those 
businesses  that  meet  the  specific 
parameters that fit our business model 
and growth strategy. 

target 

Quarto has a long history of acquisitions. 
Most  recent  ones  have  included  small 
world  creations  in  2014,  Ivy  Press  in 
2015,  and  Harvard  Common  Press, 
Burgess  Lea  Press  and  becker&mayer 
in  2016.  All  are  already  contributing 
positively to the Group.

Over  the  years,  we  have  developed  
a  successful  model  and  track  record  
in 
integrating  acquired  businesses 
quickly and effectively.

Businesses  acquired  bring  additional  
innovation  and  expertise  to  Quarto.  
Each  time  we  buy  a  company,  the 
culture of our whole Group changes for 
the better. 

Organic Growth
Growing  Quarto  organically,  either 
by bringing more creativity to market, 
expanding  and  developing  our 
business  with  existing  customers  or 
by  gaining  new  business  with 
additional  customers,  is  an  integral 
part  of  our  strategy  to  enhance 
shareholder value.

Building  long-term  relationships  with 
our  customers:  We  pride  ourselves  in 
the excellent business relationships we 
have  built  over  the  years,  both  in  our 
main US and UK markets but also with 
over  550  foreign  language  co-edition 
partners around the world. By offering 
the  best  product 
range,  being 
knowledgeable about the marketplace, 
and  by  providing  excellent  levels  of 
service, we have gained our customers’ 
trust and confidence.

Acquiring  new  customers:  We  are 
constantly striving to find new customers 
and opening new distribution channels. 
Bookstores  are  only  one  of  the  many 
places  you  can  find  our  books  in;  we 
sell  books  wherever  we  believe  our 
consumers  might  come  across  them. 
That  includes,  for  instance,  Tractor 
Supply,  Costco,  Urban  Outfitters  or 
Holland & Barrett, among many others. 

Expanding  our  offering:  We  strive  to 
expand  our  business  with  all  our 
customers,  either  by  expanding  our 
product  offering  available  to  that 
customer, or expanding to parts of their 
operations  where  we  might  not  have 
previously been a recognised supplier. 

8

Strategic ReportOUR SIX KEY  
ACQUISITION PARAMETERS:

1

CATEGORY ENHANCING
Adds new titles to our portfolio  
and expands one of our categories,  
e.g. Harvard Common Press.

4

STEP CHANGERS
Significant additions  
to the business,  
e.g. becker&mayer

2

ADDITIONAL EXPERTISE
Brings an area or market we  
do not have expertise in, e.g.  
small world creations, specialised  
in children’s 0–3 formats.

5

ADJACENCIES
Complementary to existing 
portfolio and sales channels,  
such as Book Plus and  
educational products,  
e.g. SmartLab

3

COMPETITOR INGESTION
Synergistic consolidation, 
e.g. Ivy Press,

6

DISTRIBUTION ENHANCING
A business that owns a specific  
channel to market.

“We were initially a little nervous about joining a 
bigger company and maybe losing control and our 
identity. In reality, it has been a two-way process. 
We have benefited from Quarto’s scale, size and 
platform, as well as bringing our people and ideas 
to the Group. Now we are part of the team.” 

Simon Gwynn
Group Publisher, Ivy Press

9

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT

“Quarto has a clear vision, a clear  
strategy for the future and an experienced  
Senior Leadership Team.” 

Peter Read
Chairman

2016  was  my  first  year  as  Chairman  of 
The Quarto Group, following my election 
at  the  Annual  Meeting  in  May  2016. 
Consistently,  I  have  been  impressed  by 
the  quality  of  the  people  I  have  met 
within the organisation, at all levels. They 
showed restless passion and innovation 
last  year,  whether  they  had  been  with 
Quarto for a long time or have joined the 
Group  more  recently,  including  those 
who have joined through acquisitions.

Quarto  continues  to  demonstrate  the 
market  value  and  global  demand  for 
illustrated  print  books.  Since  2012,  debt 
has  been  reduced,  adjusted  Group 
operating  profit  and  dividends  have 
increased  and  strong  foundations  for 
future growth have been put in place. In 
resilient 
2016,  Quarto  showed  a 
performance  in  its  publishing  business, 
with revenue growth of 6% and adjusted 
operating  profit  growth  of  17%.  The 
Group  achieved  its  largest  publishing 
profit ever – a gratifying result considering 
the uncertain economic environment. 

Quarto  has  a  clear  vision  to  become 
the  dominant  publisher  of  illustrated 
books  worldwide,  a  clear  strategy  for 
the  future  and  an  experienced  Senior 
Leadership Team.

10

In the course of 2017, the Group will be 
refocused  on 
its  core  publishing 
expertise, following the exit of Books & 
Gifts  Direct  (BGD)  in  Australia/New 
and  Regent  Publishing 
Zealand 
Services in Hong Kong. The Board has 
regularly  discussed  whether  Quarto 
was 
the  correct  owner  of  both 
businesses.  BGD  has  disappointed  for 
a  number  of  years,  and  whilst  Regent 
Publishing  Services  has  performed 
well  since  it  was  founded  in  1985,  the 
Board  believed  that  Quarto  should 
focus  on  what  it  does  best  –  making 
and selling books.

further 

Refocused  on  its  publishing  activities, 
Quarto  will  be  uniquely  positioned  to 
create 
shareholder  value, 
through  its  rich  portfolio  of  content, 
the  combination  of  organic  and 
acquisitive growth, further distribution 
development  and  added  value  from 
the Group’s operational platform.

I joined a Board comprising three Non-
Executive  Directors  and  two  Executive 
Directors, 
including  Chief  Executive 
Marcus  Leaver.  Our  Non-Executive 
Directors  constructively  challenge  and 
advise the Executive Directors, contribute 

Strategic ReportINVESTMENT CASE

Global leader in illustrated publishing
Resilient  global  book  market,  especially 
in 
illustrated  books.  Unrivalled  footprint  and  size. 
Substantial  IP  with  a  back  catalogue  of  10,000 
titles and an annual investment of about $35m.  
Solid  expertise  and  performance  in  foreign 
language rights. 

Attractive, de-risked business model
Clear  focus  on  enduring  IP  in  the  long  term. 
Market,  channel  and  customer  diversity.  Not 
dependent on immediate best-sellers with close 
to  60%  of  sales  p.a.  from  back  catalogue.  
Co-edition  model 
lower  risk  with  high  
revenue visibility. 

is 

Growth story and financial strength
Publishing  revenues  up  26%  since  2012  and 
publishing  adjusted  operating  profit  up  69% 
since  2012.  Net  debt  reduced  24%  from  2012  
to date.

Balanced and growing imprint portfolio
Solidity  and  balance  –  both  geographical  
and  genre.  Increasing  exposure  to  children’s 
books,  one  of  the  faster  growing  areas  in 
publishing.  Organic  growth  supplemented  by 
acquisitive growth. 

Global consolidation platform
International publishing platform is both flexible 
and  scalable.  Clear  acquisition  strategy  with 
magnitude of possible opportunities in the short 
to  medium  term.  Systems  and  people  in  place; 
acquisition capabilities and track record. 

47

FOREIGN 
LANGUAGE 
MARKETS

39

LANGUAGES

to  the  development  of  strategy  and 
monitor  the  delivery  of  the  Group’s 
strategy. Michael Hartley and Jess Burley 
both bring very different skill sets to the 
Board  and  respectively  chair  the  Audit 
Committee and Remuneration Committee. 
Unfortunately,  our  third  Non-Executive 
Director, Marie-Louise Windeler, stepped 
down at the end of September for health 
reasons.  The  Nominations  Committee  is 
making good progress in its search for a 
new  Non-Executive  Director  and  we 
hope to provide an update soon. 

submitted 

his 
Michael  Connole 
resignation  as  CFO  on  30  March  2017. 
The  Board  has  commenced  an 
executive  search  to  identify  a  suitable 
replacement for the role. Having known 
Michael  for  more  than  25  years,  I  am 
particularly sorry to see him leave the 
Group but wish him and his family well.

Alongside  Chief  Executive  Marcus 
Leaver,  Quarto  has  an  experienced  
and  international  operational  Senior 
Leadership  Team  that  provides  solid 
strategic  direction  to  the  business.  I 
have every confidence in the successful 
continued  development  of  the  Group 
under their leadership.

Additionally,  Quarto’s  solid  institutional 
ownership structure, following the placing 
of  approximately  35%  of  the  Company’s 
shares with blue chip investors over the 
last  18  months,  will  be  a  benefit  to  the 
Company  as  it  continues  to  grow  and 
deliver its potential over the coming years. 

The Board is pleased to recommend a 
final  dividend  of  9.87c  per  share, 
making the total dividend for the year 
15.0c per share, a 3% increase over last 
year,  giving  dividend  cover  excluding 
BGD,  based  on  adjusted  earnings  per 
share  of  54.7c  (2015:  46.0c)  or  3.6 
times (2015: 3.2 times). 

On  behalf  of 
the  Board  and  all 
shareholders, I would like to thank all our 
people, as well as our global ecosystem of 
partners and suppliers, for their continued 
hard work and commitment to Quarto.

Peter Read
Chairman
19 April 2017

11

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016CHIEF EXECUTIVE  
OFFICER’S STATEMENT

“We celebrated our 40th anniversary with  
our largest publishing profits ever.”

Marcus E. Leaver
Chief Executive

Overview
We delivered a resilient performance in 
our  publishing  business  in  2016  and 
celebrated  our  40th  anniversary  with 
our largest publishing profits ever. The 
hard work and tenacity of every Quarto 
the 
employee 
business 
particularly  carried 
the  Company 
through a challenging year.

across 

We exploited the size, scale and reach 
we have built in the last five years and 
enhanced  our  business  with 
two 
strategic  acquisitions  that  are  already 
contributing positively to the Group. 

In  2017,  our  exit  from  both  BGD  and 
Regent  Publishing  Services  will  allow 
us  to  focus  entirely  on  our  publishing 
long  believed 
portfolio.  We  have 
that  Quarto,  once  fully  positioned  on 
what we do best – making and selling 
books  –  has  a  unique  opportunity  in 
a  fragmented 
industry  to  become 
the  dominant  publisher  of  illustrated 
books worldwide.

Strategic Update
Our  children’s  publishing  revenues 
grew  by  34%  year-on-year  and  have 
increased  by  135%  since  2012.  Our 
Foreign  Rights  sales  team  achieved  a 
record  performance  with  8%  revenue 
growth  despite 
foreign  currency 
fluctuations  in  certain  markets.  The 
extended  value  of  our  backlist  was 
confirmed  by  the  review  of  the  useful 
economic  lives  of  our  titles.  As  we 
continually seek to further expand our 
scale  and  reach  across  the  globe,  our 
new  publishing  partnership  with 
Kalimat  Group  to  publish  books  in 
Arabic  in  the  Middle  East  and  North 
Africa is also a major highlight. 

As  in  any  portfolio,  some  areas  of  the 
business had more success than others. 
Each of our 48 imprints is at a different 
stage  of  maturity  and  point  in  its 
creative cycle, from young start-ups to 
longer-running 
imprints  that  might 
need  new  creative  injection,  and  to 
businesses at the top of their game.

12

Strategic ReportSENIOR LEADERSHIP TEAM

Michael Connole
Chief Financial Officer

Ken Fund
Chief Operating Officer

David Breuer
Chief Creative Officer

(Resignation submitted 
30 March 2017)

President and CEO, Quarto 
Publishing Group USA, until 
31 December 2016

Managing Director, Quarto 
International Co-Editions, 
until 31 December 2016

Karine Marko
Group Director of  
Foreign Rights

Sally Dwyer
Group Director  
of People

David Inman
Managing Director,  
Quarto Partners

Managing Director, Quarto 
Publishing Group UK,  
until 31 December 2016

Dorothée de Montgolfier
Group Director of 
Communications

Anne Crompton
Group Director of Legal  
and Business Affairs

13

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER’S STATEMENT CONTINUED

“The creativity, tenacity and team  
spirit of everyone employed in the business,  
coupled with the strategic direction provided  
by our experienced Senior Leadership Team,  
have been key to our ongoing success.”

The  dedication,  commitment  and 
passion  of  everyone  employed  in  the 
business,  coupled  with  the  strategic 
direction provided by our experienced 
Senior Leadership Team, have been key 
to  our  ongoing  success.  In  particular, 
I would like to recognise Ken Fund and 
David  Breuer,  recently  appointed  to 
the new global roles of Chief Operating 
Officer  and  Chief  Creative  Officer,  
as well as Karine Marko, Group Director 
of  Foreign  Rights,  who  have  made 
significant 
the 
contributions 
business this year.

to 

I would also like to express our thanks 
to  Michael  Connole,  Chief  Financial 
Officer,  who  has  decided  to  resign. 
Significant  changes  have  been  made 
to the business over the last 18 months 
or so and the Group is now well placed 
as  a  focused  publishing  business.  We 
all wish Michael and his family the best 
in the future.

Since I took over as Chief Executive in 
late  2012,  my  aim  has  been  to  make 
Quarto  an  even  healthier  and  more 
talented  company.  We  have  become 
more  profitable 
in  our  publishing 
business  while  continuing  to  invest 
more in the quality of our books and in 
our global sales and marketing teams. 
We  have  attracted  new,  extremely 
talented people to our already excellent 
teams. We are strategically well placed 
in  our  markets  as  our  direct 
relationships with retailers continue to 
develop. Our model is simple but solid: 
the right People, high quality and long-
lasting  Product,  efficient  Processes,  
a balanced Portfolio of imprints and a 
global, scalable Platform.

The clarity of this model has facilitated 
the onboarding of acquired businesses 
in the last two years and we now have 
a  tested  and  solid  integration  process 
in place. 

a 

and 

anticipated 

Operating Review
Overall,  our  2016  performance  is  a 
gratifying  result  set  against  a  more 
difficult  trading  background  than  we 
had 
tough 
comparative  given  the  success  of 
colouring  books  in  2015.  Undeniably, 
2016  has  been  an  uncertain  and 
unpredictable  year,  economically  and 
politically, in both our largest domestic 
markets. While  we  have  fulfilled  many 
of  the  business  objectives  that  we  set 
ourselves,  there  are  others  that  we 
have not met. 

Our net debt at 31 December 2016 was 
$61.9m (2015: $59.5m), a result of both 
poor trading within BGD and negative 
working  capital  timing  movements  in 
the  final  quarter.  However,  due  to  the 
strong  underlying  performance  of  the 
business, the Board has recommended 
an  increase  in  the  Company’s  final 
dividend.  Working  capital  and  debt 
management will remain a key point of 
focus in 2017.

including  2016,  and 

BGD has disappointed for a number of 
years, 
the 
exceptional 
impairment  charge  of 
$14.2m  has  impacted  our  overall  2016 
results negatively.

14

Strategic Report+6%

PUBLISHING 
REVENUE

+17%

PUBLISHING 
ADJUSTED 
OPERATING  
PROFIT

from 

revenue 

The  performance  of  our  publishing 
operations is set out later in this report. 
Total 
publishing 
operations  of  $154.6m  showed  a  6% 
increase  on  2015  ($145.3m).  Adjusted 
operating  profit  for  these  publishing 
businesses for 2016 was $21.7m which 
was  up 
17%  (2015:  $18.5m).  We 
reviewed the useful lives of our backlist 
of  illustrated  book  titles  during  the 
year and the pre-publication costs for 
all our imprints are now amortised over 
three  years.  This  review  confirms  the 
fact that, taken across all our illustrated 
titles, our backlist continues to sell for 
at  least  three  years.  This  has  reduced 
our  amortisation  charge 
for  2016 
by $2.1m.

New Organisational and 
Reporting Structure 
On  1  January  2017,  we  implemented 
a  new  organisational  structure  which 
establishes  a  stronger  partnership 
between  creative,  commercial  and 
financial management within the Group, 
while  enabling  us  to  respond  to 
changing  market  conditions  and 
acquisition opportunities with enhanced 
agility and purpose. 

imprints  no 

We  have  moved  on 
from  our 
geographical business divisions. In line 
with  our  philosophy  of  creative 
longer 
independence, 
report  into  a  country  division  but  are 
run  as  independent  businesses  with 
creative,  commercial  and 
financial 
oversight  from  the  centre.  They  are 
serviced and supported by our central 
and global platform. 

As a consequence, starting in 2017, we 
will  no 
longer  report  revenue  by 
the 
publishing  divisions,  but  by 
geography of where transactions take 
place, including the US, UK, Rest of the 
World and foreign rights. 

Outlook
In  2016  we  delivered  a 
resilient 
performance in our publishing business 
through  a  combination  of  organic 
two 
growth 
strategic acquisitions. 

supplemented  with 

We  were  not  helped  by  the  political 
climate  in  our  two  domestic  markets, 
nor  by  the  resultant  volatility 
in 
currency  which  resulted 
in  slower 
trading  in  our  traditionally  stronger 
second half.

In  the  very  short  term,  we  feel  it 
prudent  to  assume  a  continuation  of 
this  uncertainty  in  2017  and  we  are 
budgeting  accordingly.  Nevertheless, 
for  the  year  as  a  whole,  we  expect  to 
show  further  progress  in  the  business 
and  redouble  our  efforts  in  net  debt 
management  and  capital  allocation 
for growth. 

Looking forward, the future for Quarto 
remains  very  exciting.  With 
the 
disposals  of  both  BGD  and  Regent 
Publishing  Services  in  the  first  half  of 
2017, we shall be able to focus resolutely 
on  what  we  do  best  –  making  and 
selling  books.  The  Group  is  full  of 
running  a 
talented  entrepreneurs 
diverse  portfolio  of 
imprints,  who 
leverage  our  global  platform  to  grow 
their businesses and to create valuable 
IP,  which  we  are  selling  into  more 
markets,  in  more  foreign  languages 
and through more distribution channels 
than we have ever done before.

Quarto  has  a  unique  opportunity  in  a 
fragmented  industry  to  become  the 
dominant publisher of illustrated books 
worldwide,  exploiting  the  size,  scale 
and reach we have built in the last five 
years.  In  2017,  we  shall  continue  to 
pursue that goal.

Lastly, a large thank you to each one of 
our  employees  worldwide.  They  make 
Quarto  the  success  that  it  continues  
to  be  and  their  creativity,  tenacity  
and  collaboration,  especially,  have 
carried 
through  a 
challenging year.

the  Company 

Marcus E. Leaver
Chief Executive
19 April 2017 

15

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016OUR BUSINESS MODEL  
AND STRATEGY

OUR BUSINESS MODEL

We are the leading global illustrated non-fiction book  
publisher. Our mission is to make and sell great books that 
entertain, educate and enrich the lives of adults and  
children around the world. We make high-quality books  
as economically as possible, and we sell these books  
as far and wide and for as long as we possibly can.

Our model is simple but solid: the right 
People,  high  quality  and  long-lasting 
Product, 
a 
balanced  Portfolio  of  imprints  and 
a global, scalable Platform.

Processes, 

efficient 

People 
Our  people  and  talent  make  Quarto. 
Each  of  our  48  imprints  is  creatively 
independent,  publishing  what  they 
believe is right for their customer base 
and the market. That is the underpinning 
ethos of Quarto. 

Product
Each  of  our  imprints  has  a  different 
vision  for  the  products  they  produce. 
We  are  proud  of  the  wide  variety  of 
books we publish and our unique, high 
quality content. 

Portfolio 
All  our  imprints  make  up  a  diversified 
portfolio  that  strengthens  with  each 
addition,  whether  organic  start-up 
or acquisition.

Process 
Our  books  are  created  by  many 
different  people  but  underpinned  by 
one financial model. 

1

Platform 
All our imprints are sitting on the Quarto 
platform  of  operations,  people,  sales 
and  marketing  that  we  have  built  and 
adhering to the financial model through 
which we manage our portfolio. 

Our goal in formally recognising  
the ‘Quarto Pentagon’ is to systematise  
our business model so that we  
enhance our organisational IP, allow 
transmission of the operating model easily 
throughout the Group, and support the 
transition of new businesses and imprints 
as we grow.

16

Strategic ReportOUR STRATEGY

ORGANIC 
GROWTH

ACQUISITION  
GROWTH

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 
INVESTMENT

We  are  constantly  looking  to 
grow  our  publishing  revenues 
organically,  both  by  expanding 
and  developing  our  business 
with  existing  customers  and 
by  gaining  new  business  with 
additional customers.

We  also  search  for  businesses 
that satisfy key criteria, including 
earnings  accretive  lists,  imprints 
or  businesses  that  can  enhance 
the  marketing  and  sales  efforts  
imprints  while  at  
of  existing 
the 
providing 
same 
opportunities  to  extract  further 
value as part of The Quarto Group.

time 

Quarto  is  committed  to  invest  
in  long-lasting  IP.  In  pursuing  
ideas,  writing, 
the  very  best 
photography, 
and 
artwork 
design,  we  aim  to  safeguard 
the  future  revenue  streams  of 
the business.

OPERATING MODEL 
EFFICIENCIES

DISTRIBUTION  
DEVELOPMENT

is 

imprints  and 
Each  of  our 
creatively 
businesses 
independent  while 
receiving 
support, scale and reach through 
the  Group’s  global  operations, 
sales and marketing platform. We 
leverage  our  scale  to  buy  print 
and freight effectively, as well as 
identifying 
being  relentless 
other supply chain efficiencies.

in 

We  develop  direct  physical 
distribution 
relationships  and 
partnerships, and are committed 
to  selling  our  books  wherever 
consumers  might  come  across 
them  –  and  in  multiple  markets, 
languages and formats.

“Each of our imprints and businesses is creatively  
independent while adhering to one financial model  
and receiving support, scale and reach from our global  
platform, which includes operations, sales and foreign  
rights sales, marketing, IT, people and legal. We leverage  
our scale to buy print and freight effectively, and we are 
relentless in identifying other supply chain efficiencies.”

Ken Fund
Chief Operating Officer

17

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 20162016 PORTFOLIO HIGHLIGHTS

“Quarto’s expertise is in creating great content that stands the 
test of time and constantly reinventing long-lasting niches of 
interest. Once again, highlights from 2016 show the breadth of 
our books across topics, adults and children, backlist and 
frontlist, individual titles and successful series.” 

David Breuer
Chief Creative Officer

Color Me and Portable Color Me Series
Published 2015 
$2,909,000 
1.9% publishing revenue

Creative Lettering  
and Beyond
Published 2014 
$1,388,000 
0.9% publishing revenue

Art Lab for Kids
Published 2012 
$150,000 
0.1% publishing revenue

Art Lab for Kids is a refreshing 
source of wonderful ideas for creating 
fine art with children. this step-by-step 
book offers 52 fun and creative art projects 
set into weekly lessons. the exercises 
include drawing, move through painting 
and printmaking, and build to paper,  
collage, and mixed media.

• each lesson shares and relates to the  
  work of a contemporary artist and  
  their unique style.

• open-ended lessons can be explored  
  over and over—with different results  
  each time!

• the perfect book for creative families,  
  friends, and community groups and  
  works as lesson plans for both experi- 
  enced and new art teachers.

• Colorful photographs illustrate how  
  different people using the same lesson  
  will yield different results, bringing out  
  each artist’s personal style. 

also available:

series

series

Print & stamp Lab
978-1-59253-598-9

drawing Lab for mixed-media artists
978-1-59253-613-9

Playing with books
978-1-59253-600-9

“ susan schwake’s Art Lab for Kids is a well-thought-out 
guide, making it easy to introduce art into children’s lives. 
simple, clear explanations of technique, combined with  
inspiration from established artists, will enable children to 
feel successful and encouraged to explore art as a form  
of expression.”

—rebecca emberley 
best-selling children’s book author and illustrator

“ Art Lab for Kids encourages all ages to be fearless in seek-
ing and nurturing their creativity. with lessons, inspiration, 
and advice, susan schwake gives you the tools to find and 
explore your artistic side.”

founder and editor of whipup.net and action-pack.com

 —kathreen ricketson 

N
A
E

ISBN: 978-1-59253-765-5
$22.99 US | £15.99 UK | $24.99 CAN
Visit www.QuartoKnows.com
 Follow us on

52 Creative adventures  

in drawing, Painting,  
Printmaking, PaPer,  
and mixed media

For  
For 
Budding  
Budding 
Artists of All 
Artists of 
All Ages
Ages

series

susan s chwake
PhotograP hy by   
rainer schwake

series

A
R
t

l
a
b

F
O
R

K

I

D
S

P
a
P
e
r

,

i

a
n
d
m
x
e
d
m
e
d
a

i

i

5
2
C
r
e
a
t
v
e
a
d
v
e
n
t
u
r
e
s

i

n

d
r
a
w
n
g

i

,

i

P
a
n
t
n
g

i

,

i

P
r
n
t
m
a
k
n
g

i

,

 S
c
h
w
a
k
e

FOR KIDS

26885 - Art Lab For Kids_flexicvr.indd   1

(PMS 3125 C)

Job:09-26885/26894   Title:RP-Art Lab For Kids
10-AC74867(VIVIAN) Dtp:204 Page:Flexs Cover

10/29/15   12:55 PM

All New Square Foot  
Gardening – 2nd Ed.
Published 2013 
$307,000 
0.2% publishing revenue

101 Dog Tricks
Published 2007 
$274,000 
0.2% publishing revenue

The Book of Home 
How-To
Published 2014 
$209,000 
0.1% publishing revenue

18

Strategic Report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1001

YOU MUST SEE BEFORE YOU DIE

With more than one and a half million copies sold 

worldwide in 30 languages, 1001 Movies You 

Must See Before You Die celebrates the great and 

groundbreaking, classic and cult, must-see movies 

of all time, offering a treasure trove of incisive, 

witty and revealing insights. Spanning more than a 

century of extraordinary cinema, this comprehensive 

volume brings together the most significant movies 

from every country and all genres, from action to 

Western, through animation, comedy, documentary, 

musical, thriller, noir, short, romance and sci-fi. 

Newly revised and updated for 2016, this 

definitive edition features 500 original movie posters 

and hundreds of stunning movie stills. Quotes from 

movie directors and critics, together with little-

known facts, complement the penetrating reviews 

and vital statistics of each movie to make this the 

most fact-filled edition ever.

So, whether your passion is rom-com or art 

house, The Blue Angel or Blue Velvet, 1001 Movies 

You Must See Before You Die is bound to become 

the only film book to which you will ever turn.

REVISED EDITION

Y
1
O
0
U
M
0
U
S
1
T
S
E
E
B
E
F
O
R
E
Y
O
U
D
I
E

STEVEN JAY SCHNEIDER

GENERAL EDITOR
STEVEN JAY SCHNEIDER

UPDATED BY
IAN HAYDN SMITH

£20.00

of movie horror, has written, talked, taught and 

aesthetics and psychoanalysis to the joys of the 

published extensively on all aspects of film, from 

Steven Jay Schneider, one of the true connoisseurs 

1001 Movies (2016 Edition)
First published 2001 
$245,000 
0.2% publishing revenue

favourites, and a guilty reminder of just how 

makes for addictive browsing, and likewise 

many great movies I haven’t seen yet . . .”

“Both a fun stroll through some all-time 

comprises the best that film writing has to offer.  

It includes contributors to Empire, Sight & Sound, 

slasher flick. Here he has brought together more 

“As edited by Steven Jay Schneider, it  

CineAction, Film Quarterly, NME, the Washington  

Undercurrent’s Chris Fujiwara in Tokyo, the team 

From Le Monde’s Jean-Michel Frodon in Paris to 

than 50 of the finest writers, reviewers, critics, 

Total Film, International Film Guide, LA Weekly, 

Post, Filmmaker, MovieMaker and many more.

professors, aficionados and filmmakers from  

Time Out, Rolling Stone, the New York Times, 

features top-quality stills.” 

—Aubrey Day, Total Film

around the globe. 

 —Film Review

Block Wonders
Published 2016 
$410,000 
0.3% publishing revenue

Ian Haydn Smith is the update editor for 1001 Movies 

You Must See Before You Die. He is a London-based 

writer and the editor of Curzon Magazine.

Front Photo: 
The Revenant © Pictorial Press Ltd/Alamy Stock Photo

Back Photo:  
Mad Max: Fury Road © Village Roadshow/The Kobal Collection 

ISBN 978-1-84403-889-3

9

7 8 1 8 4 4 0 3 8 8 9 3
www.octopusbooks.co.uk

The Book of Beetles
Published 2014 
$203,000 
0.1% publishing revenue

The KetoDiet  
Cookbook
Published 2016 
$242,000 
0.2% publishing revenue

The Bread Lover’s Bread  
Machine Cookbook
Published 2000 
$237,000 
0.2% publishing revenue

Vegan Bowl Attack!
Published 2016 
$189,000 
0.1% publishing revenue

Build the Dragon and  
Build the Human Body
First published 2013 
$690,000 
0.4% publishing revenue

Cutest Puppies Ever
Published 2016 
$439,000 
0.3% publishing revenue

Secrets of... (Shine a Light)
First published 2013 
$1,843,000 (nine titles) 
1.2% publishing revenue

19

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
OUR KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

Our strategy is to grow our revenue and margins 
by leveraging our size, scale and reach as the 
leading global illustrated book publisher, to build 
a business with sustainable growth in earnings 
per share while also managing our net debt.

ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT 
BEFORE DEPRECIATION 
(EBITDA) 
($M)

PUBLISHING ADJUSTED 
OPERATING PROFIT 
($M)

2016

20151

20142

20132

20122

17.8

17.7

17.0

15.9

16.5

2016

2015

2014

2013

2012

21.7

18.5

15.8

14.3

12.8

EBITDA 
is  used  to  measure  the 
operational performance of the Group.

Publishing adjusted operating profit up 
69% since 2012. 

RETURN ON NET  
OPERATING ASSETS 
(%)

2016

7.4

20151

20142

20132

20122

13.4

12.0

11.8

11.0

NET DEBT 
($M)

2016

2015

2014

2013

2012

61.9

59.5

66.0

71.0

81.0

long-term 

The  Board  uses  this  ratio  to  evaluate 
the 
financial  health  of  
the  Group.  Excluding  Books  &  Gifts 
Direct,  the  return  on  net  operating 
assets for 2016 was 14.1%.

Our net debt has reduced by 24% since 
2012.  Our  2016  net  debt  is  a  result  of 
both  poor  trading  within  BGD  and 
negative  working 
timing 
movements in the final quarter, and we 
will  redouble  our  efforts  in  net  debt 
management in 2017.

capital 

1  Restated as per Note 1. 
2   The 2014 closing balance sheet restatement was all corrected through the 2014 results as it 

was impractical to determine the impact on these earlier individual financial years and it is 
not expected to result in a material change to these years.

3  The definitions and additional information in relation to these alternative performance measures 

are included in Note 32 to the financial statements.

20

Strategic ReportADJUSTED DILUTED  
EARNINGS PER SHARE 
(CENTS)

2016

 5.6

20151

20142

20132

20122

46.1

39.1

36.1

41.6

BACKLIST % OF SALES 
(%)

2016

2015

2014

2013

2012

58.3

61.4

66.6

71.3

69.8

The  Board  uses  this  ratio  to  evaluate 
the quality of the Company’s earnings. 

Backlist has reduced as a % of sales as 
we have invested in new IP. 

Excluding  Books  and  Gifts  Direct,  the 
adjusted diluted earnings per share for 
2016 was 53.5c (2015: 46.0c).

INVENTORY % OF REVENUE 
(%)

2016

20151

20142

20132

20122

12.7

13.8

13.9

11.2

12.6

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 
DEVELOPMENT SPEND 
($M)

2016

2015

2014

2013

2012

37.2

34.9

33.5

31.7

30.5

This is a measure of the cash used up in 
inventory as a proportion of revenue. 

We have increased the IP spend to grow 
the  publishing  portfolio  organically. 
Frontlist  sales  have  grown  by  74%  in 
the period.

PRODUCT EFFICIENCY

2016

2015

2014

2013

2012

1.57x

1.34x

1.16x

1.01x

1.02x

CHILDREN’S PUBLISHING 
REVENUES 
($M)

2016

2015

43.4

32.4

2014

23.0

2013

19.6

2012

18.5

This is the new title sales for any given 
year  divided  by  the  IP  spend  of  the 
previous  year.  It  is  a  leading  indicator 
of  how  effective  and  reliable  our 
backlist sales might be. 

Children’s  publishing  revenues  have 
increased by 135% since 2012.

21

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016RISK MANAGEMENT, PRINCIPAL  
RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES

The Quarto Group’s risk management framework is designed 
to identify and assess the likelihood of risks arising, the 
consequences of them doing so and the actions necessary  
in order to mitigate their impact. 

The Board has carried out its periodic 
assessment  of  the  principal  business 
risks  facing  our  various  businesses 
and  has updated these risks in its risk 
register,  which  is  regularly  reviewed. 
The Board continues to monitor these 
principal risks and associated material 

controls. Details of the Group’s financial 
risk  management  objectives  and 
policies  are  set  out  in  Note  22  to  the 
financial statements. The business risk 
review identified the following key risks 
that face our businesses.

MARKET AND FINANCIAL RISKS

Risk

Description

Mitigating factor

Economic 
conditions

Currency

The  Group  operates  across  many  of  the  major 
world economies and our revenues and profits 
depend on the general state of the economy in 
those territories. A downturn caused by a global 
recession could reduce consumer discretionary 
spending,  which  might  result  in  a  reduction  in 
profitability  and  operating  cash  flow.  The  UK’s 
exit  from  the  European  Union  and  the  US 
elections have also caused some uncertainty in 
the economic environment.

The Group’s businesses operate in a number of 
different  currencies  giving  rise  to  a  risk  of 
exchange  loss  due  to  fluctuating  exchange 
rates.

Acquisitions 
integration

strategy 

The  Group’s  growth 
includes 
acquisitions.  Although  the  Group  has  a  tested 
integration  model  for  acquired  businesses, 
there is a risk that not all of the acquisitions will 
be successful. 

OPERATIONAL RISKS

The  Group  has  adequate  facilities  with  over  $90m  in 
available  debt  facilities.  In  addition,  in  such  an  event, 
the  Directors  have  the  ability  to  take  a  number  of 
mitigating  actions, 
reduction  of 
including 
discretionary spend on pre-publication costs. 

the 

The  Group  has  hedging  and  currency  swaps  in  place. 
We  have  a  natural  hedge  that  mitigates  against 
currency  movements  impacting  our  earnings  in  that 
one of our largest costs, which is print costs, are paid in 
US Dollars. Borrowings have been taken out in different 
currencies  to  mitigate  risk  of  currency  movements 
impacting our net assets.

The Group continually reviews acquisition targets and 
has established processes and procedures with regard 
to  detailed  pre-acquisition  due  diligence  and  post-
acquisition integration.

Risk

Customer

Description

Mitigating factor

A significant dependency on a small number of 
customers,  for  instance  co-edition  partners  or 
retailers,  could  be  problematic  if  one  of  them 
terms  or 
tried 
stopped  doing  business  with  the  Group.  The 
failure  of  a  major  customer  could  impact 
revenue and profits.

renegotiating  preferential 

The  Group  has  a 
long-established  strategy  of 
diversifying its customer base, resulting in the fact that 
no  one  customer  has  a  significant  percentage  of  the 
business. Customer relations are well managed with all 
Quarto’s  larger  customers  to  ensure  a  fair  trading 
relationship.  Management  monitors  debts  closely  and 
maintains close relationships with all customers, which 
may provide prior warning of likely failure.

22

Strategic ReportOPERATIONAL RISKS

Risk

Description

Supply chain 
and raw 
materials

Product 
safety

The  Group  uses  a  number  of  print  suppliers, 
many  of  which  are  based  in  Southern  China. 
There  is  a  risk  that  an  interruption  in  the 
availability  of  printing  services  in  that  area  or 
the financial failure of one printer could disrupt 
the distribution of new books to customers. Any 
increase  in  costs  such  as  oil,  port  charges  etc. 
would  also 
impact  shipping  costs.  Any 
disruption  in  supply  of  paper  could  lead  to  an 
increase  in  costs  and  production  disruption. 
There  is  also  a  reputational  risk  of  using  non-
environmental paper.

Our business is faced with increasing safety and 
testing 
requirements  on  various  product 
components,  especially  for  our  Book  Plus 
products.  The  risk  of  a  product  recall  due  to 
children’s 
severe 
reputational impact on the business. 

safety  would  have  a 

Loss of 
intellectual 
property

A  loss  of  stored  IP  through  failure  of  storage 
medium  or  loss  of  back-ups  would  impact  our 
ability  to  process  reprints  and  revisions  and 
could cause a loss of revenue. 

Mitigating factor

The Group maintains relationships with printers in other 
parts of the world and is confident that printing could be 
carried out by an alternative range of printers if supply 
from  China  was  interrupted  or  to  mitigate  shipping 
costs.  We  maintain  close  relations  with  our  printers, 
reducing the risk of a lack of knowledge of any printer 
being  in  financial  trouble.  The  Group  worked  with  our 
major  printers  on  a  plan  to  move  to  sustainable  paper 
and  recently  instituted  a  Forest  Stewardship  Council 
(FSC)  paper  or  Sustainable  Forestry  Initiative  (SFI) 
paper policy across all our imprints. 

All components receive safety testing from independent 
third  parties.  Management  carefully  selects  suppliers 
for  components.  The  Group  has  two  dedicated 
Sourcing  and  Quality  Managers  who  handle 
components sourcing and safety test management.

We regularly review our storage and back-up routines 
and disciplines. A new title management system for our 
Publishers that improves the security of and access to 
our IP was rolled out to our US business during the year, 
and  we  anticipate  the  UK  roll  out  to  be  completed 
in 2017.

Laws and 
regulations

As  a  creative  and  IP  business,  any  changes  to 
copyright  laws  could  have  an  impact  on  the 
Group’s  activities  and  any  infringement  could 
lead  to  increased  costs.  Inconsistent  internal 
practices  for  negotiating  contracts  or  clearing 
rights could lead to IP claims. 

Quarto  has  recently  streamlined  and  simplified  the 
number of legal entities it operates through, and reviewed 
the  structure  of  our  Legal  team,  including  hiring  a  new 
Group  Director  for  Legal  and  Business  Affairs.  This  will 
ensure that all practices are aligned and consistent across 
imprints and geographies within the Group. 

Cyber 
security

People

Like  many  organisations,  the  Group  is  at  risk 
from  cyber-attack.  This  presents  a  potentially 
serious  risk  of  disruption  to  the  production 
process and could have a significant impact on 
the profitability of the business and the security 
of IP assets.

As in any creative business, the Group is heavily 
reliant  on  its  people  and  operates  with  the 
inherent risk of not making the ‘right’ books, or 
creativity being uneven year-on-year. Failure to 
retain  existing  talent  and  attract  new  talent 
could  ultimately  lead  to  a  failure  to  generate 
new titles, leading to a drop in revenue. 

The  Group  uses  firewalls  and  IT  controls  to  prevent 
attack  as  well  as  maintaining  offsite  back-up  of  IP. 
Computerised  files  of  the  Group’s  books  are  also 
maintained by printers. We do not store any personal 
or  credit  card  data  on  our  transactional  website 
quartoknows.com.  We  undertook  a  full  review  and 
upgrade of our IT systems in 2016.

Our portfolio of imprints and large number of products 
spread this risk. With the exception of colouring books 
in 2015, no single book accounts for more than 1.0% of 
our  annual  sales.  Quarto’s  Publishers  are  experienced 
and  talented,  and  strive  to  stay  close  to  publishing 
trends and markets. The Group also offers competitive 
market  rate  remuneration  packages  and  has  been 
working on making Quarto an attractive place to work.

23

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016FINANCIAL REVIEW

“Operating profit for the Group (excluding BGD) 
was $17.7m, an improvement of 22%.”

Michael Connole
Chief Financial Officer

Presentation of Results 
The presentation of our results for 2016 
shows the results of our Books & Gifts 
Direct  (BGD)  business  separately  as 
we  have  indicated  that  we  are  exiting 
this  business.  BGD  did  not  meet  the 
criteria  to  be  accounted  for  as  a 
discontinued operation at the balance 
sheet  date.  The  additional  separate 
disclosure was considered appropriate 
to  allow  better  understanding  of  the 
Group results given the disposal of the 
BGD  Australian  business  completed 
post year end. 

Note  32  to  the  financial  statements 
explains  the  alternative  performance 
measures  we  use 
the 
performance of the Group.

judge 

to 

Group Results including BGD
Revenue  for  the  year  was  $188.4m 
showing  an  increase  of  3%  on  the 
comparative figure for 2015 of $182.2m 
(as  restated).  The  Group’s  operating 
profit  of  $1.7m  shows  a  $13.6m 
reduction  on  the  comparative  figure 
for  2015  of  $15.3m  (as  restated)  and 
$14.2m 
principally 
exceptional impairment charge relating 
to the BGD business referred to above. 
The loss before tax for the Group was 
$1.3m  (2015:  profit  before  tax  of  
$12.2m, as restated), also reflecting the 
exceptional impairment charge. 

reflects 

the 

24

Strategic ReportGroup Results excluding BGD 
The following commentary looks at our 
results  for  2016  excluding  BGD,  which 
comprises our publishing business and 
Regent  Publishing  Services  in  Hong 
Kong. We also completed the disposal 
of  Regent  Publishing  Services  on 
31 March 2017.

Revenue  for  2016  of  $169.1m  shows  a 
6% increase on the comparative figures 
for  2015  of  $160.1m.  The  Harvard 
Common  Press  and  becker&mayer 
publishing  businesses  which  we 
acquired in the US during 2016, account 
for $12.7m of 2016 revenue. 

Adjusted  operating  profit,  which  is  a 
key  measure  of  how  the  business  is 
performing,  rose  by  19%  from  $15.6m  
in 2015 to $18.6m in 2016. This includes 
a  combined  contribution  of  $2.3m 
from  the  Harvard  Common  Press  and 
becker&mayer  businesses. 
It  also 
includes the benefit of $2.1m relating to 
the  reduction  in  the  amortisation  of 
our capitalised pre-publication costs. 

During the year, we undertook a review 
of the useful lives of the pre-publication 
costs  incurred  in  the  development  of 
illustrated  book  titles.  Certain  of  our 
imprints that we had either started up 
or  acquired  in  the  last  few  years  had 
been employing  useful lives that were 
shorter than three years. We examined 
the  sales  of 
imprints  and 
these 
determined  that  their  respective  sales 
profiles  now  justified  using  a  three-
year  useful  life.  The  capitalised  pre-
publication costs for all our illustrated 
book  titles  are  now  amortised  on  a 
straight  line  basis  over  three  years. 
As  stated  in  Note  1  to  the  financial 
revisions  were 
statements, 
accounted 
for  prospectively  as  a 
change in accounting estimate and as 
a result, the amortisation charge of the 
Group for the current financial year has 
been reduced by $2.1m.

the 

The  Quarto  International  Co-Editions 
business  had  a  very  good  2016, 
recording an adjusted operating profit 
of  $9.4m,  an  increase  of  47%,  with 
from 
another  strong  contribution 
children’s  publishing  and  from 
Ivy 
Press,  which  we  acquired  in  March 
2015.  Quarto  Publishing  Group  USA 
also  had  a  good  year  with  adjusted 
operating profit of $9.6m, an increase 
of 8% on the 2015 figure of $8.9m. As 
stated  above,  it  benefited  from  the 
contribution  of  the  acquired  Harvard 
Common  Press  and  becker&mayer 
businesses,  which  helped  offset  the 
reduction  in  the  sales  of  adult  art 
instruction/colouring books with which 
we  had  particular  success  in  2015. 
Quarto  Publishing  Group  UK  had  a 
disappointing  year  with  adjusted 
operating  profit  of  $2.8m  showing  a 
15%  decline  on  2015,  with  one  imprint 
having  a  particularly  disappointing 
year and recording a contribution loss 
for the year.

Operating  profit 
the  Group 
excluding  BGD  was  $17.7m  (2015: 
$14.5m), an improvement of 22%. 

for 

Books & Gifts Direct 
We  completed  the  disposal  of  the 
Australian  operating  company,  Books 
&  Gifts  Direct  Pty  Limited  (BGD 
Australia)  on  31  March  2017.  The 
consideration  for  the  sale  of  the 
company  is  A$1  and  Quarto  will  also 
take  an  assignment  of  certain  debts 
owed  by  the  master  franchisees  to 
BGD  Australia  of  A$1.9m  (US$1.4m) 
which  will  be  repayable  in  monthly 
instalments  over  two  years,  and  are 
interest  bearing.  The  repayments  will 
be  used  to  reduce  the  Group’s  bank 
debt  as  they  are  received.  Quarto  is 
entitled  to  receive  10%  of  the  profit 
before interest and tax of the business 
for the next five years. Our direct sales 
business  in  New  Zealand,  remains  for 
sale, and we are currently discussing a 
potential  disposal  with  a  number  of 
interested parties. 

25

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016FINANCIAL REVIEW CONTINUED

in 

cut-off 

to  proper 

transit  and 

In  the  process  of  finalising  the  results 
of the BGD business for the year ended 
31  December  2016,  we  uncovered 
errors  in  the  cut-off  procedures  and 
accounting  for  returns  in  relation  to 
stock in transit and the related liability 
accounts at BGD Australia. The errors 
were  caused  by  a  failure  in  controls 
relating 
and 
reconciliation procedures in respect of 
stock 
related 
purchase  clearing  accounts,  and 
accounting  for  returns  on  certain 
products. The errors have required the 
restatement  of  the  result  of  BGD  for 
the year ended 31 December 2015 with 
a reduction in operating profit of $0.7m 
through  an  increase  in  cost  of  sales. 
This  has  resulted  in  lower  operating 
margins  for  that  year.  It  has  also 
required the restatement and reduction 
of retained earnings at 1 January 2015 
by $1.0m. Further details are set out in 
Note 1 to the financial statements.

the 

The  business  recorded  revenue  of 
$19.4m for 2016, which declined by 12% 
on  the  2015  comparative  figure  of 
$22.1m, indicating the continued weak 
both 
environment 
economic 
Australia  and  New  Zealand  where  the 
business has operated.

in 

restated) 

The  operating  loss  for  the  year  of 
$16.1m (2015: operating profit of $0.8m, 
as 
included  exceptional 
impairment charges of $14.2m to write 
down  the  net  and  other  attributable 
assets  of  BGD 
their 
recoverable value. The total impairment 
charge  includes  $8.0m  relating  to  the 
impairment of the net operating assets 
of  the  business,  together  with  $6.2m 
relating to the impairment of goodwill. 
Further details are set out in Note 3 to 
the financial statements.

reflect 

to 

Finance Costs
Finance  costs  of  $3.1m  (2015:  $3.2m) 
represent  the  interest  costs  on  the 
Group’s  borrowings  together  with  the 
issuance 
amortisation  of  the  debt 
costs.  The  decrease  in  net  finance 
costs  despite  higher  net  debt  at  
31 December 2016 arose as our interest 
margin reduced.

Tax
The  tax  charge  for  the  year  of  $4.0m 
(2015: $3.7m) arises on the loss before 
tax as no tax credit has been recognised 
on the BGD loss before tax for the year 
of  $16.1m.  The  effective  tax  rate  for  
the  Group  excluding  BGD  is  27.3% 
(2015:  25.1%).  A  significant  proportion 
of  the  Group’s  taxable  profit  arises  in 
the  US  where  the  federal  tax  rate  is 
34%.  In  the  absence  of  tax  reform  in 
the US, we expect the effective rate to 
remain  at  approximately  the  current 
effective rate.

(Loss)/Earnings Per Share
Our  loss  per  share  of  28.5c  (2015: 
earnings per share of 41.3c, as restated) 
and  our  adjusted  basic  earnings  per 
share of 5.7c (2015: 46.2c, as restated) 
are  both  principally  explained  by  the 
exceptional 
impairment  charge  of 
$14.2m  relating  to  BGD.  Our  adjusted 
basic earnings per share for the Group 
excluding  BGD  of  54.7c  shows  an 
annual 
the 
comparative  figure  for  2015  of  46.0c 
and  reflects  the  increase  in  the  profit 
before  tax.  Note  10  to  the  financial 
statements  sets  out  how  we  calculate 
the adjusted earnings per share figures. 
Our adjusted dividend cover excluding 
BGD  was  3.6  times  (2015:  3.2  times) 
is  calculated  using  adjusted 
and 
earnings  per  share.  See  Note  32 
for details.

increase  of 

19%  on 

26

Strategic ReportReturn to Shareholders
The  Directors  are  recommending  a 
final dividend for the year of 9.87c per 
share,  bringing  the  total  dividend  for 
the year to 15.0c per share (2015: 14.5c 
per share). 

We also acquired the assets of Harvard 
Common Press in February 2017 for a 
total  consideration  of  $1.0m,  of  which 
$0.2m  was  paid  in  cash  and  $0.8m  in 
loan notes payable in 2017. Goodwill of 
$0.8m arose on the acquisition.

Cash Flow 
Cash  generated  by  the  operations  of 
the  business  amounted  to  $43.7m 
(2015:  $51.9m)  and  the  reduction  on 
last year’s figure reflects a disappointing 
last quarter of 2016 which historically is 
our  best  quarter  for  generating  cash, 
with  poor  trading  within  BGD  and 
negative  working 
timing 
movements around the year end. 

capital 

increase 

investment 
reflects 

We  invested  $37.2m  (2015:  $34.9m)  
in  pre-publication  costs  using  the  
cash  generated  from  operations  and 
in  
the 
in  our 
pre-publication  costs 
the 
acquisitions 
in  the  year  and  our 
continued  investment  in  new  titles  we 
publish each year. This year’s new titles 
become  part  of  our  backlist  in  the 
following  year.  We  spent  $3.7m  on 
acquiring new businesses (2015: $1.6m) 
and  $1.6m  on  capital  expenditure 
(2015:  $2.0m).  The 
in 
pre-publication costs for new titles and 
our 
in  acquiring  new 
businesses  are  key  factors  in  driving 
future revenue growth.

investment 

investment 

Acquisitions
We acquired becker&mayer in August 
2016 for a total consideration of $11.1m. 
$2.3m was paid in cash on completion, 
with  a  further  $7.5m  payable  in  loan 
notes,  of  which  $2.5m  was  paid 
in January 2017, with $2.5m payable in 
August  2017  and  $2.5m  payable  
in August 2018. We have also provided 
for $1.5m for contingent consideration 
arrangements.  Provisional  goodwill  of 
$2.3m arose on the acquisition.

Both acquisitions have been accounted 
for  under  the  acquisition  method  and 
further details are set out in Note 30 to 
the financial statements.

Net Assets
The  Group’s  net  assets  of  $44.1m  at 
31  December  2016  show  a  reduction  
of  $9.3m  on  the  2015  comparative 
figure  of  $53.4m  (as  restated),  mainly 
reflecting  the  loss  for  the  year,  the 
dividends of $2.9m paid to shareholders 
and  deferred  tax  on  certain  exchange 
in  our  currency 
gains 
translation reserves. 

included 

Indebtedness and Borrowing 
Facilities
Our  net  debt  comprising  our  bank 
borrowings  less  cash  balances  has 
increased  from  $59.5m  to  $61.9m. 
Although net debt did not fall in 2016, 
it  has  reduced  by  $19.1m  in  the  last  
four  years  since  31  December  2012.  
The  continued  reduction  of  our  net 
debt remains a key a key objective for 
the  Group.  Our  bank  borrowings  at 
31  December  2016  were  $80.7m 
(2015: $84.6m). 

In  February  2015,  the  Group  agreed  a 
$95m  multi-currency  term  loan  and 
revolving  credit  facility,  which  expires 
on 30 April 2019. We repaid $5m of the 
term  facility  in  February  2016  and 
February 2017. 

The  facility  requires  us  to  maintain 
certain levels of interest cover, leverage 
and  cash  flow  in  the  business  and  
the  interest  payable  on  the  debt  is 
based  on  a  ratchet  whereby  we  pay 
LIBOR  plus  a  margin  of  between  2.1% 
and  2.8%  depending  on  our  leverage 
ratio.  We  also  have  a  £5m  working 
capital  overdraft 
is 
renewable annually. 

facility,  which 

27

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016FINANCIAL REVIEW CONTINUED

A  direct  result  of  our  disappointing 
cash generation in the final quarter of 
2016  was  that  we  did  not  pass  the  
cash flow after debt service (‘CFADS’)
cover  covenant  test  at  31  December 
2016,  contained  within  our  banking 
facilities  agreement.  This  does  not 
constitute  a  breach  of  the  Group’s 
banking 
facilities.  The  agreement 
states that if we do not pass a particular 
quarter’s  cash  flow  covenant  test,  it 
does not amount to a breach provided 
that  it  is  the  first  time  we  have  not 
passed  the  test  and  that  we  pass  the 
test at the end of the next quarter. The 
seasonality  of  the  publishing  industry 
means  there  is  always  a  degree  of 
sensitivity  around  our  working  capital 
movements.  We  have 
identified 
mitigating actions that would maintain 
covenant  headroom  in  such  situations 
and  the  Directors  are  confident  that 
the Group will comply with all financial 
covenants  for  the  foreseeable  future. 
Please  refer  to  Note  1  and  19  to  the 
financial statements for further details 
relating to our banking covenants.

it  also  transacted 

Currency
The Group reports in US Dollars, which 
is the principal functional currency, but 
during  2016 
in 
Sterling, Euros, Australian Dollars, New 
Zealand Dollars and Hong Kong Dollars. 
We use a currency swap arrangement 
to  mitigate  the  fluctuations  between 
US Dollars and Sterling. Our borrowings 
are  drawn  in  US  Dollars,  Sterling  and 
Euros  to  hedge  the  movement  in  our 

net assets in those currencies. The key 
exchange rates for the year are shown 
in the table below.

Exchange Rates
In  the  year,  all  of  the  currencies  we 
transact  in  weakened  against  the  US 
Dollar.  The  net 
these 
currency movements on our net assets 
was to increase them by $0.7m (2015: 
reduction of $2.3m as restated). 

impact  of 

Principal Risks and 
Uncertainties
Details  of  the  principal  risks  and 
uncertainties  are  set  out  on  pages  22 
and 23. 

Details  of  the  Group’s  financial  risk 
management  objectives  and  policies 
are  set  out  in  Note  22  to  the  financial 
statements. 

Going Concern and Viability 
Statement
In  accordance  with  provision  c.2.2  of 
the 2014 revision of the UK Corporate 
Governance  Code,  the  Directors  have 
assessed  the  prospects  of  the  Group 
over both a one-year and a three-year 
period.  The  one-year  period  has  a 
greater 
is, 
therefore,  used  to  set  budgets  for  all 
our businesses which culminates in the 
approval  of  a  Group  budget  for  the 
Board.  The  three-year  period  offers 
less certainty, but is aligned with long 
term  incentives  offered  to  Executive 
Directors 
senior 
management. 

level  of  certainty  and 

certain 

and 

Versus US Dollar 

Sterling

Euro

Australian Dollar

New Zealand Dollar

Hong Kong Dollar

Year end rate

 Average rate 

2016

0.81

0.95

1.38

1.43

7.72

2015

0.64

0.83

1.22

1.28

7.77

% 
change

27%

14%

13%

12%

(1%)

2016

0.74

0.90

1.36

1.44

7.79

2015

0.65

0.90

1.33

1.43

7.73

% 
change

14%

–

2%

1%

1%

28

Strategic Report 
products 

The  Directors  have  considered  the 
underlying  robustness  of  the  Group’s 
business  model, 
and 
proposition  and 
its  recent  trading 
performance,  cash  flows  and  key 
indicators.  They  have 
performance 
also  reviewed  the  cash 
forecasts 
prepared  for  the  three  years  ending 
31  December  2019,  which  comprise  a 
detailed  cash  forecast  for  the  year 
ending 31 December 2017 based on the 
budget  for  that  year  and  standard 
growth  assumptions  for  revenue  and 
costs for the years ending 31 December 
2018 and 2019, to satisfy themselves of 
the going concern assumption used in 
preparing the financial statements.

The  Directors  have  assessed 
the 
Group’s  viability  over  a  three-year 
period  ending  on  31  December  2019 
based on a financial model which was 
prepared  as  part  of  the  process  of 
considering  and  approving  the  2017 
budget. The Directors used the three-
year  review  period  for  the  following 
reasons:

•  The  Group’s  publishing  programme 
planning cycle normally works over 
a two to three-year period.

•  The  Group’s 

current  banking 
facilities have just over two years to 
run  before  they  will  need  to  be 
refinanced in April 2019. Consistent 
with previous facilities, the Directors 
have  assumed  that  these  facilities 
will be renewed or extended at that 
time on similar terms.

In carrying out their analysis of viability, 
the  Directors  took  account  of  the 
Group’s  projected  profits  and  cash 
flows,  its  banking  covenants  and  the 
impact  of  a  downturn  in  trading  that 
the  Group  could  endure  whilst 
remaining viable. 

They also took account of the principal 
risks  and  uncertainties  facing  the 
business referred to above, a sensitivity 
analysis  on  the  key  revenue  growth 
assumption  and  the  effectiveness  of 
available  mitigating  actions.  Based  on 
their assessment, the Directors have a 
reasonable expectation that the Group 
will  be  able  to  continue  in  operation 
and meet all of its liabilities as they fall 
due up to 31 December 2019.

For this reason, they continue to adopt 
the  going  concern  basis  in  preparing 
the  financial  statements.  In  doing  so, 
it 
is  recognised  that  such  future 
assessments  are  subject  to  a  level  of 
uncertainty  that  increases  with  time 
and, therefore, future outcomes cannot 
be  guaranteed  or  predicted  with 
1  to  the  financial 
certainty.  Note 
additional 
provides 
statements 
information  on  the  Group’s  banking 
covenants and sensitivity.

Michael Connole
Chief Financial Officer
19 April 2017

29

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016C

o
l
e
c
c
i
o
n

d
e

H

u
e
s
o
s

i

D
n
o
s
a
u
r
i
o
s

Saludos

Preparese para ser sorprendido por esta incre ble 
coleccion de brillantes huesos de algunas 
fascinantes criaturas prehistoricas. Descubra 

lo que sus huesos revelan sobre 

como viv an, y a continuacion 

eche un vistazo mas de cerca 

a las propias criaturas.

I

N I K K E I

F u s i ó n   d e   l a s   c o c i n a s 
j a p o n e s a   y   s u d a m e r i c a n a

La cocina nikkei es una celebración de las excepcionales y deliciosas recetas surgidas a 

raíz del maridaje de la tradición culinaria sudamericana y la japonesa. Si bien son muchos 

los restaurantes nikkei que gozan del beneplácito y el reconocimiento internacionales, 

Luiz Hara se centra en este libro en el aspecto más casero de la cocina. Descubra de la 

mano del autor la fascinante evolución de la cocina nikkei en Sudamérica y otros países. 

Gracias a esta estupenda selección de más de un centenar de recetas, que representan lo 

mejor de la cocina nikkei y que, además, cuenta con recetas de algunos de los mejores 

chefs nikkei de todo el mundo, podrá cocinar con este estilo en su propia cocina.

N o. 22

Ευρωπαϊκός 
σκαντζόχοιρος

Γατόπαρδος

N o.  78

Eche un vistazo más de cerca 
a los cuernos distintivos de un 
aterrador Triceratops.

N o.  3

E

K

K

I

N

A

R

A

H

Z

I

U

L

Preservamos el medio ambiente

• Reciclamos y reutilizamos.

• Usamos papel de bosques gestionados

de manera responsable.

ISBN 978-84-16138-73-9

9 7 8 8 4 1 6 1 3 8 7 3 9

Who lives in the rainforest?

JKT_LA COCINA NIKKEI_son sol.indd   1

BONE DINOS_UK SPA.indd   1

N o. 2

Ελέφαντας

N

o.

1

2

{ Tiranosaurio }

0

will find a world filled with great surprises!

Explore a rainforest habitat up close and you

Shine a light behind the page and see. . .

From tree frogs living inside plants to stealthy

 jaguars on the forest floor, the hidden wonders

of this amazing habitat are revealed.

Η συλλογή μου
Averigüe qué tan grande era 
XX
realmente el cráneo de un 
p a
ΖΩΑ
the
temible Tyrannosaurus Rex.

e

g

to light

ο κόσμος των θαυμαστών πλασμάτων
Ανακάλυψε τον υπέροχο κόσμο των ζώων μέσα σε αυτό 
το βιβλίο δραστηριοτήτων με την πλούσια εικονογράφηση!

Vea cómo un grande y voluminoso 
Iguanodon utilizó las púas en sus 
pulgares como armas secretas.

d
l
o
h

Είναι γεμάτο απίστευτες πληροφορίες, γρίφους με ζώα, 
εκπληκτικά αυτοκόλλητα και μία αφίσα για να 
φρεσκάρεις τις γνώσεις σου για τα ζώα.

inside h i d d

•

e

e

s

o

t

e n

•

LUIZ HARA

Ετοιμάσου για εξερεύνηση!

F o t o g r a f í a s  d e  L i s a  L i n d e r

N o.  27

N

o.

1
1

8

y
o
t
r
o
s

p
r
e
h
i
s
t
ó
r

i
c
o
s

i

a
n
m
a
l
e
s
s
t
a

bit
ha

{ Plesiosaurio }

{ Lambeosaurus }

{ Stegosaurus }

Μ

ε
γ
ά
λ
ο
ς

ρ
ι
ν
ό
λ
ο
φ
ο
ς

No
.1

Coleccion de Huesos
Dinosaurios

Υ
y otros animales prehistóricos

Γκρίζος λύκος

Τ Ο ΚΟΛΛΗΤΑ • ΑΦΙΣ

σ
τ
ρ
ι
ξ

Ύ

N o.  109

o.
6

N

N

N

1
2

o.

o.

8
9

 ΓΡΙΦ ΟΙ • Α

Α

Πολική αρκούδα

{ Pterosaurio }

Νυχτερίδα με 
ρουθούνια-σωλήνες

Μεγάλος γέρβιλος

N

o.

7
7

ν
ω
τ
ά
μ
σ
α
λ
π
ν
ώ
τ
σ
α
μ
υ
α
θ
ν
ω
τ

ς
ο
μ
σ
ό
κ
ο

Α
Ω
Ζ

X

υ
ο
μ
ή
γ
ο
λ
λ
υ
σ
Η

á
v
o
y
E
p
o
o
C

n

i

Κ

α
μ
η
λ
ο
π
ά
ρ
δ
α
λ
η N o. 64

N o.  78

Αρουραίος-
καγκουρό

Η συλλογή μου
XX
{ Triceratops }

ΖΩΑ
•  ΒΙΒΛΙΟ ΔΡΑΣΤ Η Ρ Ι

Ο

{ Ictiosaurio }

ο κόσμος των θαυμαστών πλασμάτων

N

o.
9
8

Η ΤΩΝ  •

Τ

N o.  103 Οδόβαινος

Μ

τ
ο
υ

Λ

ο
ύ
μ
ο
λ
τ
ζ

∆

ε
ν
δ
ρ
ο
λ
α
γ
ό
ς

9

o.

N

Πίκα
Skvělé rECEpty začínají intEnzivní Chutí

24/3/16   14:41

DIVISIONAL REVIEW
Γιγάντιο πάντα

r
E

Vaříte  rádi?  A  chtěli  byste,  aby  vaše  kulinářské  výtvory  byly  ještě  lepší,  ještě  lahodnější,  zkrátka 
neodolatelné? Pak je tato kniha právě pro vás.
Γαλάζια φάλαινα

Zavedeme vás do království chutí a vůní. Vyluhování – neboli odborně řečeno příprava infuzí – je 
postup, při němž se z bylinek, koření, ovoce a dalších ingrediencí dobývá intenzivní chuť i aroma. Není 
to vůbec nic těžkého. A nebudete potřebovat ani žádnou chemickou laboratoř. Snadno si vystačíte 
s tím, co máte v kuchyni.

N o. 72

X

N

Nabízíme  vám  135  chuťových  bomb,  které  pozvednou  vaše  kulinářské  výtvory  do  říše  delikates. 
Nápoje, omáčky, oleje, octy, bittery, vývary, sladkosti, zkrátka vše, co si dovedete představit, můžete 
s pomocí svých domácích výluhů lehce přetvořit v díla hodná šéfkuchaře.

ISBN 978-960-16-7079-9

ΜΕΙΓΜΑ
Χαρτί από
υπεύθυνες πηγές

7+

o.

Φακόχοιρος

Pracovní  postupy  jsou opravdu jednoduché. Někdy stačí jen obyčejné spaření  či  lehké povaření, 
jako  například  u  bylinek  či  ovoce.  S  využitím  oleje,  vody,  octa  nebo  alkoholu  si  snadno  připravíte 
svůj vlastní vanilkový, citronový, pomerančový nebo mátový extrakt, osvěžující a zdravou kombuchu, 
zajímavé  bylinné  čaje,  sladké  sirupy,  labužnické  omáčky  a  pikantní  dochucovadla.  Vše  si  můžete 
vyzkoušet v receptech též uvedených v knize.

9   7 8 9 6 0 1   6 7 0 7 9 9
Boηθ. κωδ. μηχ/σης 11079

Γορίλλας

o.
6
5

WWW.patakis.gr

N

C
a
r
r
o
n
B
r
o
w
n
&
A
l
y
s
s
a
N
a
s
s
n
e
r

MAE50_R3_PER_PLC    Size:466x295mm   Spine:14mm

2
4

SHINE-A-LIGHT
y Magische Welten

e
c
n
e
s
e

C
a
r
n
o
v
s
k

•

• Mit  F

í

a

von Carnovsky     •     Text von Rachel Williams

Erin CoopEyová

α
ρ
μ
ό
τ
α

nový trend

infuzování 
     esence chutí a vůní

• domácí oleje, octy
N o. 77
• bittery, limonády
• omáčky 

r b zauberlu

Ε
υ
ρ
ω
π
α
ϊ
κ
ή

Άι-άι

ε
ν
υ
δ
ρ
ί
δ
α

30/07/15   12:22

N

5

o.

1

p

•

e

MAE61_R3_GREK_Cover_R4  Size:446.5mmX298mm Spine:6.5mm

í

n
ů
v

a
Α

γ
ρ
í
ι
t
ο
κ
u
ο
ύ
h
ν
ε
c
λ
ο

n
á
v
o
z
u
f
n

Tauch ein in die Natur und entdecke  
zehn der artenreichsten Lebensräume der Erde –  
kunstvoll gestaltet vom Mailänder Designduo Carnovsky.

Die beiliegende magische Farbzauberlupe macht die fantastischen 

Lebenswelten des Dschungels, der Ozeane, der Steppen und Wälder  

sichtbar: Die Tiere des Tages sind durch die rote Lupe zu erkennen, 

die Tiere der Nacht durch die blaue und die Pflanzen durch die grüne.

Was wird dir auf deiner Reise durch die Wildnis begegnen?

Price: £10.99

M
a
g

i
s
c
h
e

W

e
l
t
e
n

Carron Brown & Alyssa Nassner

I

www.metafora.cz

K-SORF_Rainforest-CVR_PLC-UK.indd   1

27/06/2014   10:02

Infusing Flavors_cover_CZ_12,5.indd   1

30.10.2016   22:21:37

ISBN 978-3-7913-7282-2  

2282731973879

Entdecke  

verborgene 

Lebensräume  

mit der   

Zauberlupe! 

7282_Magische Welten_cov.indd   1

18.05.16   09:56

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Saludos

Preparese para ser sorprendido por esta incre ble 

coleccion de brillantes huesos de algunas 

fascinantes criaturas prehistoricas. Descubra 

lo que sus huesos revelan sobre 

como viv an, y a continuacion 

eche un vistazo mas de cerca 

a las propias criaturas.

C

o

l

e

c

c

i

o

n

d

e

H

u

e

s

o

s

D

i

n

o

s

a

u

r

i

o

s

p

r

e

h

i

s

t

ó

r

i

c

o

s

o

t

r

o

s

a

n

i

m

a

l

e

s

s

t

a

bit

ha

N o. 22

Γατόπαρδος

N o.  78

Ελέφαντας

N

o.

1

2

{ Tiranosaurio }

0

Ευρωπαϊκός 

σκαντζόχοιρος

Eche un vistazo más de cerca 

a los cuernos distintivos de un 

aterrador Triceratops.

Η συλλογή μου

Averigüe qué tan grande era 

XX

realmente el cráneo de un 

temible Tyrannosaurus Rex.

p a

ΖΩΑ

the

N o.  3

e

g

to light

y

N o.  27

N

o.

1

1

8

ο κόσμος των θαυμαστών πλασμάτων

Vea cómo un grande y voluminoso 

Ανακάλυψε τον υπέροχο κόσμο των ζώων μέσα σε αυτό 

o

l

d

h

Iguanodon utilizó las púas en sus 

το βιβλίο δραστηριοτήτων με την πλούσια εικονογράφηση!

t

o

pulgares como armas secretas.

Είναι γεμάτο απίστευτες πληροφορίες, γρίφους με ζώα, 

e

s

εκπληκτικά αυτοκόλλητα και μία αφίσα για να 

φρεσκάρεις τις γνώσεις σου για τα ζώα.

e

inside h i d d

e n

•

•

Ετοιμάσου για εξερεύνηση!

{ Stegosaurus }

Μ

ε

γ

ά

λ

ο

ς

ρ

ι

ν

ό

λ

ο

φ

ο

ς

.1

No

Coleccion de Huesos

Dinosaurios

y otros animales prehistóricos

Γκρίζος λύκος

Τ Ο ΚΟΛΛΗΤΑ • ΑΦΙΣ

Ύ

N o.  109

N

ρ

σ

N

ξ

N

6

τ

o.

ι

o.

2

8

o.

1

Υ

9

 ΓΡΙΦ ΟΙ • Α

Α

Πολική αρκούδα

ν

π

{ Pterosaurio }

Νυχτερίδα με 

ώ

σ

τ

Μεγάλος γέρβιλος

ρουθούνια-σωλήνες

N

o.

7

7

Η συλλογή μου

XX

{ Triceratops }

ΖΩΑ

ο κόσμος των θαυμαστών πλασμάτων

•  ΒΙΒΛΙΟ ΔΡΑΣΤ Η Ρ Ι

Τ

Ο

Η ΤΩΝ  •

{ Ictiosaurio }

N

o.

9

8

τ

ο

υ

Λ

ο

ύ

μ

ο

λ

τ

ζ

∆

ε

ν

δ

ρ

ο

λ

α

γ

ό

ς

λ

η N o. 64

N o.  78

Αρουραίος-

καγκουρό

N o.  103 Οδόβαινος

nový trend

α

ρ

ό

μ

Μ

τ

α

9

o.

N

N

o.

1

5

Άι-άι

Ε

υ

ρ

ω

π

α

ϊ

κ

ή

ε

ν

υ

δ

ρ

ί

δ

α

ν

ω

τ

ά

μ

σ

α

λ

α

μ

υ

α

θ

ν

ω

τ

ς

ο

μ

σ

ό

κ

ο

Α

Ω

Ζ

X

υ

ο

μ

ή

γ

ο

λ

υ

σ

Η

X

Κ

α

μ

η

λ

ο

π

ά

ρ

δ

α

N

á

v

o

y

E

p

o

o

C

n

i

r

E

í

n

ů

v

a

Α

γ

ι

t

ο

κ

u

ο

ύ

ν

h

ε

λ

c

ο

•

í

n

á

v

o

z

u

f

n

I

Who lives in the rainforest?

Πίκα

Γιγάντιο πάντα

Skvělé rECEpty začínají intEnzivní Chutí

Shine a light behind the page and see. . .

Vaříte  rádi?  A  chtěli  byste,  aby  vaše  kulinářské  výtvory  byly  ještě  lepší,  ještě  lahodnější,  zkrátka 

λ

Explore a rainforest habitat up close and you

neodolatelné? Pak je tato kniha právě pro vás.

will find a world filled with great surprises!

Γαλάζια φάλαινα

Zavedeme vás do království chutí a vůní. Vyluhování – neboli odborně řečeno příprava infuzí – je 

postup, při němž se z bylinek, koření, ovoce a dalších ingrediencí dobývá intenzivní chuť i aroma. Není 

to vůbec nic těžkého. A nebudete potřebovat ani žádnou chemickou laboratoř. Snadno si vystačíte 

r

N o. 72

From tree frogs living inside plants to stealthy

s tím, co máte v kuchyni.

N o. 2

BONE DINOS_UK SPA.indd   1

 jaguars on the forest floor, the hidden wonders

Nabízíme  vám  135  chuťových  bomb,  které  pozvednou  vaše  kulinářské  výtvory  do  říše  delikates. 

B

o.

7+

MAE50_R3_PER_PLC    Size:466x295mm   Spine:14mm

í

ρ

4

2

of this amazing habitat are revealed.

s pomocí svých domácích výluhů lehce přetvořit v díla hodná šéfkuchaře.

υπεύθυνες πηγές

Χαρτί από

Nápoje, omáčky, oleje, octy, bittery, vývary, sladkosti, zkrátka vše, co si dovedete představit, můžete 

ISBN 978-960-16-7079-9

ΜΕΙΓΜΑ

Φακόχοιρος

Pracovní postupy jsou opravdu jednoduché. Někdy  stačí jen obyčejné  spaření  či lehké  povaření, 

jako  například  u  bylinek  či  ovoce.  S  využitím  oleje,  vody,  octa  nebo  alkoholu  si  snadno  připravíte 

6

svůj vlastní vanilkový, citronový, pomerančový nebo mátový extrakt, osvěžující a zdravou kombuchu, 

WWW.patakis.gr

zajímavé  bylinné  čaje,  sladké  sirupy,  labužnické  omáčky  a  pikantní  dochucovadla.  Vše  si  můžete 

Boηθ. κωδ. μηχ/σης 11079

N

o.

5

vyzkoušet v receptech též uvedených v knize.

a

Γορίλλας

e

9   7 8 9 6 0 1   6 7 0 7 9 9

SHINE-A-LIGHT

n

c

s

e

e

• omáčky 

• domácí oleje, octy

• bittery, limonády

N o. 77

C

a

r

o

n

r

o

w

n

&

A

l

y

s

s

N

a

s

s

n

e

r

MAE61_R3_GREK_Cover_R4  Size:446.5mmX298mm Spine:6.5mm

Erin CoopEyová

{ Plesiosaurio }

{ Lambeosaurus }

PUBLISHING BUSINESSES

QUARTO INTERNATIONAL  
CO-EDITIONS GROUP

QUARTO PUBLISHING  
GROUP USA

REVENUE 

$51.9m

(2015: $50.1m)

REVENUE 

$81.2m

(2015: $72.4m)

ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT 

ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT1,2 

$9.4m

(2015: $6.4m)

$9.6m

(2015: $8.9m)

infuzování 
   esence chutí a vůní

30/07/15   12:22

International 

Quarto 
Co-Editions 
Group  performed  well  in  2016  and  is 
continuing 
to  grow  year-on-year. 
Revenue  was  $51.9m  (2015:  $50.1m), 
up  by  4%,  and  adjusted  operating 
profit  grew  by  an  impressive  47%  to 
$9.4m  (2015:  $6.4m).  The  division 
benefited  from  good  trading  in  our 
children’s  imprints  –  one  of  our  key 
strategic areas of focus – as well as an 
outstanding performance by Ivy Press, 
which we acquired in March 2015. Like 
any  diverse  portfolio,  some  of  our 
imprints performed better than others 
due  to  a  variety  of  factors  but  we 
recognise  the  cyclical  nature  of  our 
creative  businesses  and  actively 
manage  and  revitalise  the  portfolio 
accordingly. 

ThisIsYourCookbook.com had a steady 
first  full  year  following  its  launch  in 
2015  and  proved 
its  concept  of 
producing  personalised  cookbooks. 
We saw a nice uplift particularly before 
the  Christmas  period.  We  will  invest 
some marketing funds in this business 
in 2017. It is still too early to say whether 
this new venture will reach commercial 
success, but investment in new ways of 
exploiting  our  IP  is  essential  to  the 
ongoing health of Quarto.

Price: £10.99

Carron Brown & Alyssa Nassner

www.metafora.cz

1 

2 

Includes the benefit of the reduced 
amortisation change arising from the 
review of useful lives of our titles.
Includes the contribution from acquired 
businessess.

Quarto  Publishing  Group  USA  had  an 
excellent  year.  Revenue  grew  by  12% 
over  2016,  and  adjusted  operating 
profit  improved  by  8%  from  $8.9m  to 
$9.6m. This was a particularly pleasing 
performance as the business replaced 
in  sales  of  adult  art 
the  spike 
instruction/colouring  book  titles  that 
we  saw  in  2015  with  other  titles.  As 
anticipated,  we  saw  signs  of  retail 
oversaturation  with  this  category  and 
sales  of  these  titles  have  settled  to  a 
lower,  more  consistent  level,  but  one 
in  which  our  titles  still  to  continue 
to participate. 

exceeded 

in  August 
becker&mayer,  acquired 
2016, 
management 
expectations  by  effectively  becoming 
our sixth most profitable imprint in the 
year. As stated at the time of the deal, 
this  acquisition  has  further  enhanced 
the Group’s offering in both adult and 
children’s publishing, particularly in the 
USA.  It  is  an  excellent  addition  to  our 
portfolio.  We  continue  to  focus  the 
product  of  the  SmartLab  business 
towards  Book  Plus  products  and  are 
pleased with the initial direction. 

In  addition,  we  are  satisfied  with  the 
integration of Harvard Common Press 
and  Burgess  Lea  Press,  both  also 
acquired  in  2016,  which  performed  to 
acquisitions 
expectations. 
These 
leading 
further  our  position  as  a 
publisher  of  lifestyle-orientated  titles 
for the consumer markets.

The  US  presidential  election 
November 

introduce 

did 

in 
some 

uncertainty  into  the  marketplace  and 
trading  was  a 
little  weaker  than 
anticipated  in  the  final  weeks  of  the 
year.  We  are  therefore  budgeting 
cautiously  for  2017  but  we  have  a 
strong  portfolio  of  products  and 
increasingly,  are  strategically  well 
placed in the US market.

Our  direct  relationships  with  retailers 
continue  to  develop  as  we  focus  our 
publishing  and  distribution  on  niche 
markets.  Our  strategy  remains  to 
diversify  our  channels  to  market  in  a 
way  that  matches  the  breadth  of  our 
publishing  programmes  which  cater 
for enthusiasts.  

QUARTO PUBLISHING  
GROUP UK

REVENUE 

$21.5m

(2015: $22.8m)

ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT1 

$2.8m

(2015: $3.3m)

Quarto  Publishing  Group  UK  showed 
modest growth in 2016 in absolute terms 
but  was  badly  impacted  by  currency 
volatility, resulting overall in a 6% decline, 
with  revenue  of  $21.5m.  The  UK  market 
has  been  somewhat  softer  in  2016, 
undermined  to  some  extent  by  the 
anticipation  and  result  of  the  European 
Union (EU) referendum and subsequent 
currency  volatility,  and  the  weakness  in 
Sterling  has  reduced  revenue  growth. 
As  in  the  US,  there  was  a  slow  finish  to 
the  year  and  we  are  also  budgeting 
cautiously here. That said, this remains a 
portfolio  of  good  imprints  that  publish 
excellent books.

We  have  seen  particularly  gratifying 
performances  from  Aurum  Press  in 
adults,  as  well  as  children’s  imprints 
Wide  Eyed  Editions  and  Frances 
Lincoln Children’s Books.

K-SORF_Rainforest-CVR_PLC-UK.indd   1

27/06/2014   10:02

31

Infusing Flavors_cover_CZ_12,5.indd   1

30.10.2016   22:21:37

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
     
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHILDREN’S PUBLISHING

CHILDREN’S PUBLISHING

REVENUE 

$43.4m

(2015: $32.4m)

Our children’s revenues have grown by 
34%  year-on-year,  both  organically 
the  acquisition  of 
and 
becker&mayer, which comprises about 
50% children’s books. 

through 

Overall,  our  children’s  revenues  have 
grown  by  135%  since  2012  and  it 
remains  an  area  of  strong  focus  for 
the Group. 

Our  talented  creative  teams  around 
the world are suitably teamed up with 
excellent  specialist  children’s  book 
sales people and marketers. 

We  continue  to  attract  and  develop 
talent, and constantly manage creative 
imprints, 
cycles  by  starting  new 
renewing  publishers  of  long-running 
imprints  and  examining  potential 
acquisitions  on  both  sides  of  the 
Atlantic. 

“ I will be forever grateful to Quarto 
for giving me such an amazing 
opportunity and allowing me to 
create my first book The Bear and 
the Piano. Working with such a 
forward thinking and creative team 
whilst developing my books is a joy. 
Their passion is incredibly inspiring 
and their continued support allows 
me to fulfil my dream job.”

David Litchfield
Author and illustrator

“ It was fantastic to turn the iconic 
pop anthem ‘Footloose’ into a 
children’s book working with singer 
and songwriter Kenny Loggins. We 
created MoonDance Press to make 
books for dreamers, books that 
capture young imaginations with 
enthralling stories.”

Anne Landa
Group Publisher, California imprints

“ We create the most didactic titles 
possible, including a wide range of 
books plus titles – adding components 
to books so that children can interact 
with the content and learn from it. 
We are the ‘go-to’ creators of 
innovative books for publishers 
around the world.”

Zeta Jones
Group Publisher, QED Publishing, Quarto  
Children’s Books, words & pictures

32

Strategic Report 
FOREIGN RIGHTS SALES

FOREIGN RIGHTS SALES

REVENUE 

$32.5m

(2015: $30.1m)

children’s books, are envisaged as the 
co-operation  grows.  We  see  great 
scope  for  developing  the  market  for 
illustrated  non-fiction  in  the  United 
Arab  Emirates  (UAE)  as  well  as  the 
larger  Arabic-speaking  world.  The 
category  is  currently  dominated  by 
English language imports – excluding a 
significant  potential  readership,  as 
English is not that widely spoken in the 
Arabic speaking world as a whole.

Our  Brazilian  distribution  agreement 
with Grupo Nobel, Quarto Editora, had 
a  steady  performance  in  line  with 
management  expectations.  Our  2016 
programme  included  60  titles,  with  a 
mix of core adult categories (Food and 
Wine,  Esoteric,  Pets,  Drawing)  and 
some  new  topics  such  as  Healthy 
Living, Interior, Gardening and Kids.

and 

uncertainties 

Our  Quarto  Foreign  Rights  team 
achieved  a  record  performance 
in 
2016,  particularly  commendable  given 
the 
currency 
headwinds  in  some  of  the  markets  in 
which  we  conduct  business.  This 
demonstrates 
their  expertise  and 
entrepreneurial  approach,  as  well  as 
the  solid,  enduring  relationships  they 
have  built  with  co-edition  partners  all 
over the world. 

foreign 

for  growth 

rights  sales,  we 
Besides 
continue  to  work  to  identify  further 
opportunities 
in  both 
English  and  foreign  language  –  in 
existing markets and in new markets – 
proceeding  cautiously  to  ensure  that 
we  find  the  right  partners  who  share  
our values.

In  2016,  we  entered 
into  a  new 
international  publishing  partnership 
with  Sharjah-based  Kalimat  Group. 
Our  new  Kalimat  Quarto 
imprint 
launched  in  November  2016  at  the 
Sharjah  Book  Fair  with  a  range  of 
cookbooks in Arabic repurposed from 
our existing 500 series and distributed 
throughout the Middle East and North 
including 
Africa.  Other  categories, 

Die beiliegende magische Farbzauberlupe macht die fantastischen 

Lebenswelten des Dschungels, der Ozeane, der Steppen und Wälder  

Tauch ein in die Natur und entdecke  
zehn der artenreichsten Lebensräume der Erde –  
kunstvoll gestaltet vom Mailänder Designduo Carnovsky.

“ The Foreign Rights team makes sure 
that every book gets sold in as many 
languages as possible. We’re often 
described as ‘the secret sauce of 
Quarto’ – few others in our industry 
can compete with our scale, reach 
and expertise in this field.”

die Tiere der Nacht durch die blaue und die Pflanzen durch die grüne.

sichtbar: Die Tiere des Tages sind durch die rote Lupe zu erkennen, 

Was wird dir auf deiner Reise durch die Wildnis begegnen?

2282731973879

7282_Magische Welten_cov.indd   1

ISBN 978-3-7913-7282-2  

• Mit  F

a

r b zauberlu

p

e

•

C
a
r
n
o
v
s
k

y Magische Welten

von Carnovsky     •     Text von Rachel Williams

M
a
g

i
s
c
h
e

W

e
l
t
e
n

Entdecke  
verborgene 
Lebensräume  
mit der   
Zauberlupe! 

18.05.16   09:56

Karine Marko
Group Director of Foreign Rights

“ Quarto is dynamic and proactive  
in looking at new business 
opportunities – for instance 
unexploited opportunities to offer 
access to our platform and 
distribution network to third parties, 
unexploited foreign language 
territories, or unexploited copyright 
opportunities.”

David Inman
Managing Director, Quarto Partners

33

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016 
 
TRADING BUSINESSES

QUARTO HONG KONG

REVENUE 

$14.5m

(2015: $14.8m)

ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT 

$1.6m

(2015: $1.5m)

Regent  Publishing  Services  (Regent), 
long-established  print  broking 
our 
business  based 
in  Hong  Kong, 
performed to expectations in 2016 with 
operating  profit  up  7%  from  revenues 
down 2%. 

On  3  April  2017,  we  announced  the 
completion of the disposal of our 75% 
interest  in  Regent.  The  consideration 
for  the  disposal  is  $7.0m,  including  a 
payment of $2.5m (HK$19.5m) for the 
Group’s  share  of  the  excess  cash  in  
the  business,  payable 
in  cash  on 
completion, which is expected to take 
place on 31 March 2017. The business is 
being sold to 1010 Printing Group Ltd, a 
Hong  Kong-based  printing  business 
listed  on 
the  Hong  Kong  Stock 
Exchange.  The  consideration  will  be 
used to reduce the Group’s net debt. 

Regent has performed well since it was 
founded and 25% shareholder George 
Tai  has  been  a  loyal  partner  to  the 
Group for over 30 years. 1010 Printing 
Group  Ltd,  one  of  Quarto’s  long-term 
and  most  valued  printing  suppliers,  
will  be  a  good  home  for  Regent  and 
its people.

34

Strategic ReportBOOKS & GIFTS DIRECT

REVENUE 

$19.4m

(2015: $22.1m)

ADJUSTED OPERATING  
(LOSS)/PROFIT 

$(9.8)m

(2015: $0.9m as restated)

BGD’s  revenue  for  the  year  ended 
31  December  2016  was  $19.4m, 
showing  a  decline  of  12%  on  the  2015 
figure of $22.1m. The operating loss for 
the  year  was  $16.1m  (2015:  operating 
profit  of  $0.9m  as  restated),  and 
impairment 
includes 
charges of $14.2m as discussed below. 
Further  details  of  the  exceptional 
impairment  charges  are  set  out  in 
Note 5 to the financial statements.

exceptional 

incorporated 

On  3  April  2017,  we  announced  the 
completion  of  the  disposal  of  BGD 
Australia  to  Zooom  Pty  Limited  (as 
trustee  for  the  Zooom 
Investment 
in 
Trust),  a  company 
Australia and formed for the purposes 
of  acquiring  the  business  by  a  group 
comprising  certain  of  the  master 
franchisees  and  former  employees  of 
the  business 
in  Australia.  The 
consideration  for  the  sale  of  the 
company  is  A$1  and  Quarto  will  also 

take  an  assignment  of  certain  debts 
owed  by  the  master  franchisees  to 
BGD  Australia  of  A$1.9m  (US$1.4m) 
which  will  be  repayable  in  monthly 
instalments  over  two  years  and  are 
interest  bearing.  The  repayments  will 
be  used  to  reduce  the  Group’s  bank 
debt  as  they  are  received.  Quarto  is 
entitled  to  receive  10%  of  the  profit 
before  interest  and  tax  of  Zooom  Pty 
Limited for the next five years. 

We  have  determined  that  exceptional 
impairment  charges  totalling  $14.2m 
are required to write down the goodwill 
and other net attributable assets of the 
BGD business at 31 December 2016 to 
reflect the recoverable value. 

the 

In  the  process  of  finalising  the  results 
of the Books and Gifts Direct business 
for the year ended 31 December 2016, 
errors  were  uncovered  in  the  cut-off 
procedures and accounting for returns 
in  relation  to  stock  in  transit  and  the 
related 
liability  accounts  at  BGD 
Australia.  The  errors  related  to  the 
value  attributed  to  stock  in  transit  at 
each  of 
three  years  ended 
31  December  2016,  31  December  2015 
and 31 December 2014 where detailed 
examination  has  shown  that  supplier 
invoices  for  stock  in  transit  were  not 
processed  in  the  correct  accounting 
period, nor was the correct accrual or 
return  provision 
the 
financial  statements.  The  impact  of 
these  errors  has  resulted  in  the  lower 
operating  margins  for  the  year  ended 
31  December  2015.  Full  details  of  the 
error and the restatement are set out in 
Note 1 to the financial statements. 

recorded 

in 

35

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016OUR PEOPLE

“Our priority is to invest in our talent to  
develop and to find people who are  
inspired by great work, have a growth  
mindset and a strong team orientation.” 

Sally Dwyer
Group Director of People

More than 400 talented people help us 
make and sell great books every day. 

on 

dependent 

As  a  creative  business,  we  are 
particularly 
the 
imagination and passion of our people. 
Our  priority  is  to  invest  in  our  own 
talent to grow and develop and to find 
people who are inspired by great work, 
have  a  growth  mindset  and  a  strong 
team orientation.

We  focus  on  recruiting  only  the  best 
creative  talent  we  can  find,  from 
everywhere and anywhere in the world, 
and we have a responsibility to ensure 
that each and every member of Quarto 
feels  they  can  contribute  their  best 
each and every day.

We believe our people are a competitive 
advantage for Quarto. Their creativity, 
tenacity and team spirit help grow our 
business  –  and  the  businesses  of  our 
customers – every day.

Culture and Values
Quarto  is  too  human  to  be  truly 
corporate – our imprints and businesses 
are  too  individual;  however,  we  try  to 
create a culture in which all our people 
flourish.  Every  business  has  to  find 
what  is  authentic  to  them,  and  we 
believe that when our people feel able 
to  bring  their  true  selves  to  work  we 
get the best from each other.

Our culture is a key indicator of how we 
treat each other and the behaviours we 
want to be known for. Our values shape 
the way we do business and select the 
people we work with. 

36

Strategic ReportOur Values
•  BE ACCOUNTABLE

•  BE PURPOSEFUL

•  BE CONSISTENT

•  BE EXCELLENT

•  BE CURIOUS

•  BE COLLABORATIVE 

We  believe  in  creative  independence 
and  that  the  autonomy  we  give  our 
people ensures that we remain market-
focused and relevant to all readers and 
customers. Our imprints are supported 
by  a  strong  central  platform  that 
includes  finance,  operations,  sales, 
resources  and 
marketing,  human 
foreign rights sales. 

We have designed an organisation that 
at its core has de-centralised leadership 
into  each  publishing  business,  so  that 
our  Group  Publishers  and  Publishers 
are truly running their own businesses, 
with complete creative control over the 
books they publish.

Employee Engagement
We  believe  that  treating  our  people 
with 
respect,  providing  consistent  
and  fair  policies  and  allowing  them  to 
independent  helps  
be  creatively 
demonstrate 
the  value  we  hold  
them in.

In 2016, we reviewed and increased our 
global benefits for maternity, paternity, 
adoption  and  surrogacy.  We  updated 
our internship policy to ensure that all 
interns we employ across our imprints 
and  businesses  are  paid  the  minimum 
wage.  Across  our  UK  businesses,  we 
harmonised  the  employment  terms 
and  conditions  of  all  our  employees. 
And we piloted new flexible workplace 
initiatives such as Summer hours.

In early 2017, we will conduct our first 
ever  employee  engagement  survey, 
which will give us insights into how we 
improving  the  way  our 
can  keep 
teams  
leaders  engage  with 
across Quarto.

their 

business 
greater 

environment 
Today’s 
demands 
for 
need 
collaboration,  ongoing  learning  and 
agility.  We  believe  that  about  70%  of 
an  employee’s  development  happens 
‘on  the  job’  through  problem  solving, 
shadowing and special projects, as well 
as  secondments  and 
job 
rotations. About 20% comes from their 
communities  of  practice,  both  within 
Quarto  and  their  external  networks. 
Coaching  and  mentoring  also  help 
provide  momentum.  The  final  10%  is 
through active learning events. To help 
get  the  most  from  this  10%,  we  are 
developing  Quarto  &  You  –  which  will 
allow  our  people  to  acquire  new  skills 
in a structured and consistent way.

internal 

Fostering Diversity and 
Inclusivity
The  diversity  of  people  and  ideas  is 
crucial  in  a  creative  business  such  as 
Quarto.  We  believe  that  our  teams 
should be as diverse as the communities 
we live and work in, and the people we 
publish books for. We recognise that it 
is  a  journey  and  we  are  working  to 
inclusive 
become  an  even  more 
business. 

We  do  not  discriminate  against  age, 
gender, ethnicity, cultural background, 
sexual  orientation  or  religious  beliefs. 
We  recruit,  develop  and  promote  our 
staff  based  on  their  performance 
alone. We review each job application 
and do not filter them through a system 
that  disqualifies  candidates  based  on 
education, sex or age.

We  also  promote  diversity  and 
inclusivity 
through  our  publishing 
programme – particularly some of our 
children’s  books.  As  part  of  our 
continued efforts in this space, we will 
soon launch a learning workshop called 
‘unconscious  bias’  via  our  Quarto  & 
You  platform,  to  help  our  people 
understand  their  own  biases  and  how 
these can play out in the workplace.

Sally Dwyer
Group Director of People
19 April 2017

Performance Management
Our priority is to make sure that all our 
employees  feel  that  Quarto  enables 
them  to  do  their  job  in  the  best  way 
possible. 

We ensure that individual performance 
goals  are  connected  to  the  overall 
strategic  goals  of  Quarto,  that  people 
understand  what  behaviours  are 
expected  of  them  and  that  they  have 
regular  conversations  about 
their 
performance with their line manager. 

We  have  listened  to  our  employees  
and reviewed our annual performance 
review  process,  moving  away  from  
a  single  annual  process  towards  a  
more 
formal  
quarterly  check-in.  This  allows  for 
more  timely  performance  coaching 
and development.

flexible 

and 

less 

During 2016 we undertook a review of 
the  Quarto  behaviours  to  ensure  that 
they were reflective of our values and 
the  behaviours  that  create  success  in 
Quarto. These will launch in 2017.

Launching our Purple Quagga 
Awards
We 
like  to  celebrate  our  people’s 
achievements and, in 2016, we launched 
our  first  ever  employee  award  scheme 
– the Purple Quagga Awards. 

– 

three 

These  consist  of  12  awards  in  total  – 
one  awarded  monthly  and  11  awarded 
annually 
areas: 
across 
publishing  (four  awards),  people  (four 
awards),  and  sales,  marketing  and 
foreign rights sales (four awards). Eight 
of  these  are  nominated  directly  by 
employees  or  line  managers  and  then 
chosen  by  a  panel  of  judges,  while  a 
few are metric or target driven. Winners 
can be individuals or teams and prizes 
range from $500 to $5,000. The 2016 
winners  across  all  categories  will  be 
revealed in April 2017. 

Learning and Development
We  want  to  develop  our  people  and 
enable  them  to  take  on  different  or 
more  senior  roles  within  the  business. 
We  do 
this  predominately  by 
mentoring,  coaching  and  on-the-job 
development.

37

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY  
AND SUSTAINABILITY

Our mission is to educate, entertain and enrich the  
lives of our readers through rich content and beautifully 
illustrated books, which in itself has a high social value.  
We focus on integrity in all of our activities, consider  
our impact on society and the environment, and  
work to be a good corporate citizen.

food 

dedicated to creating “a healthy and 
sustainable 
system”.  This 
donation  was  made  through  an 
agreement that advances profits on 
the Burgess Lea Press book Field & 
Feast.  Burgess  Lea  Press  was 
acquired by Quarto in May 2016 and 
donates 100% of after-tax publishing 
profits  on  every  book  to  501(c)(3) 
organisations  that  address  hunger 
relief,  farmland  preservation  and 
culinary education.

•  Our  UK-based  offices  gave  in-kind 
book  donations  to  several  charities 
across  the  year,  including  Help  for 
Heroes,  Ronald  McDonald  House 
and The Family School.

•  In  November  2016,  our  California 
office supported a volunteer project 
organised by the YMCA. Within just 
a couple of hours, Quarto employees 
helped make more than 20 blankets 
to  keep  seniors  in  need  warm  over 
the holiday season.

•   Other  local  charities  supported  by 
employee initiatives in our offices in 
2016 include: 
 – Beverly Bootstraps  

www.beverlybootstraps.org; 

 – Cradles to Crayons  

www.cradlestocrayons.org; 
 – Second Harvest Heartland 
www.2harvest.org; and

 – Assistance League  

of Irvine Thrift Shop  
www.assistanceleague.org/irvine.

Supporting our Communities
Our people individually and collectively 
contribute to the communities in which 
we live and work. We are proud of the 
efforts  our  people  make  to  educate, 
entertain and enrich the lives of many 
people,  not  just  our  readers.  Some 
of  the  highlights  for  this  year  are 
detailed below:

•   A $10,000 donation to the Goddard 
Riverside Community Center in New 
York City in support of their annual 
Gala.  The  Goddard  Riverside 
Community  Center  serves  some 
17,000 people each year through 26 
programmes  on  the  Upper  West 
Side  and  throughout  Manhattan. 
They  have  established  a  decade-
long partnership with the publishing 
industry – supported by The Quarto 
Group 
against 
homelessness.

fight 

to 

– 

•  Over £16,000 fundraised for Breast 
Cancer Now by 27 UK-based Quarto 
employees  in  May  2016,  by  walking 
100km from London to Brighton – a 
significant  portion  of  the  total  of 
£80,000  raised  by  Breast  Cancer 
Now through this event.

•  $5,000 donated to the Stone Barns 
Center  for  Food  and  Agriculture, 
a  501(c)(3)  nonprofit  organisation 

It is also worth mentioning two 
publishing projects that our imprints 
have worked on in 2016 in partnership 
with well-established charities, and 
that will publish in 2017:

•  Ivy  Press  has  created  a  book  in 
partnership  with  Mencap,  the  voice 
of 
learning  disability,  which  will 
receive 10% of proceeds from sales. 

38

£16K

FUNDRAISED 
FOR BREAST 
CANCER

$5K

DONATED TO THE 
STONE BARNS 
CENTER FOR 
FOOD AND 
AGRICULTURE

Strategic ReportAs  a  consequence,  we  estimate  that 
about  90%  of  our  published  books 
printed  from  2017  onwards  will  use  
FSC  paper.  The  remaining  10%  will  be 
moved to FSC as soon as possible and 
we are in the process of sourcing FSC-
compliant  materials  from  products 
that  require  other  specifications  than 
the  standard  paper  and  board  we 
usually  use.  We  expect  that,  by  the 
middle  of  2017,  close  to  100%  of  our 
newly  printed  books  will  use  FSC 
paper.  In  2017,  we  will  also  move  to 
FSC  paper  for  all  the  co-edition  
foreign  
books  we  print 
language customers. 

for  our 

Where we print domestically in the US, 
and  FSC  material  is  not  available,  we 
will  use  Sustainable  Forestry  Initiative 
(SFI) paper. 

We continue to work with partners and 
suppliers who are certified by the FSC, 
IS0 14001 which covers environmental 
management  systems,  and  the  ICTI 
CARE  process 
ethical 
standards of manufacturing.

covering 

Developing more sustainable 
operations
We  are  working  towards  developing 
sustainable 
as 
operations 
managing  our  carbon  emissions  by 
ensuring that we consolidate shipments 
across 
the  Group  and  ship  as 
infrequently as possible. This limits the 
shipping  of  empty  space  across  the 
oceans, and reduces energy waste and 
our impact on the environment.

such 

We  ship  most  of  our  books  to  two 
warehouses  –  one  in  the  UK  and  one  
in  the  US.  The  majority  of  our  books 
are  printed  in  southern  China  and 
shipments are consolidated. As a rule, 
we  consolidate  palletised  shipments 
from  the  printer  and  limit  movements 
to only full 40 foot containers to reduce 
our impact on the environment. When 
a  container  is  not  full,  we  will  hold 
shipment  until  the  following  week 
barring exceptional circumstances. We 
have been applying these guidelines as 
standard  practice 
for  US-bound 
shipments  for  the  last  two  years,  and 
we started for UK-bound shipments in 
mid-2016. Since we started for the UK, 
our  average  pallet  loading  for  each 
container has been 49 pallets out of a 
maximum  capacity  of  52  –  so  we  are 
performing efficiently in this area. 

The Label is a book for new parents 
as  a 
insight  
real  and  honest 
into  what  it  means  to  have  a  child 
with  Down’s  Syndrome 
the  
21st century. 

in 

Imagine 

•  Frances  Lincoln  Children’s  Books 
has created a picture book of John 
in  partnership 
Lennon’s 
with  Amnesty 
International.  The 
book  will  publish  on  21  September 
2017  and  rights  have  already  been 
sold 
languages,  with 
Amnesty  International  receiving  a 
royalty from every copy sold. 

in  seven 

The Quarto Foundation
In  2017,  we  will  launch  The  Quarto 
Foundation  to  further  support  our 
local  communities  in  areas  that  are 
close  to  our  hearts  and  business  – 
education  and  knowledge.  This  will 
enable  us  to  channel  our  charitable 
efforts  to  fund  charities  that  support 
causes  that  are  aligned  with  our 
Company’s mission. 

Every  Quarto  office  will  choose  one 
local  charity  to  support  and  will  
be  encouraged 
raise  money  
through mechanisms such as matched 
giving, 
and 
in-kind 
volunteering time. 

donations 

to 

by 

considering 

Sustainability
We  try  to  make  our  business  more 
sustainable 
the 
sustainability  aspects  of  our  most 
important  business  decisions,  where 
these  efforts  can  create  value  for  our 
to 
shareholders  while  continuing 
provide  value 
to  our  customers, 
partners and communities.

including 

The  impact  of  our  business  on  the 
environment predominantly comes from 
the  activities  we  subcontract  to  our 
suppliers 
printing, 
production,  distribution,  recycling  and 
disposal of printed books. We also have 
office-based  product  development, 
editorial, 
administrative 
activities.

sales 

and 

the 

recently 

Using sustainable paper
instituted  a  Forest 
We 
Stewardship  Council 
(FSC)  paper 
policy  across  all  our  UK  and  US 
imprints, with the following effects:

•  All  of  our  gift  and  stationery 
products  were  already  printed  on 
FSC material in compliance with the 
European Union Timber Regulation. 
That remains unchanged. 

•  At  the  start  of  2016,  we  moved  to 
FSC paper for all our children’s books 
published under Quarto imprints. 
•  As  of  1  January  2017,  this  will  be 
extended  to  all  our  adults’  books 
published under Quarto imprints. 

39

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Quarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Peter Read (60)  
Chairman

Marcus E. Leaver (46) 
Chief Executive Officer

Peter joined the Board in May 2016.

Peter is currently a non-executive 
director of EVR Holdings, Concha, 
Quayle Munro Holdings, the 
Professional Cricketers’ Association, 
the Royal Automobile Club, and the 
Motor Sports Association. He was 
formerly chairman of KPMG’s 
Telecoms, Media and Technology 
practice and a partner for over 
20 years. 

Peter chairs the Nominations 
Committee and is a member of the 
Remuneration Committee.

Marcus has been Chief Executive 
Officer since December 2012 having 
joined the Board of Quarto as Chief 
Operating Officer in May 2012. Prior  
to Quarto, he worked in the USA from 
2005, latterly as President of Sterling 
Publishing, a subsidiary of Barnes & 
Noble, the leading bricks-and-mortar 
bookseller in the US. 

Before living and working in the US,  
he worked in London for Chrysalis 
Group plc, a London Stock Exchange-
listed media company, latterly as  
Chief Executive Officer of Chrysalis 
Books Group, from 2002, and prior 
to that as Corporate Development 
Director and in a number of different 
general management roles, from 1998.

Marcus graduated from the University 
of East Anglia with a degree in Art 
History, and received his MBA from 
London Business School.

Marcus is a member of the 
Nominations Committee.

Michael Connole FCA (52) 
Chief Financial Officer 
(resignation submitted 30 March 2017)

Michael joined Quarto as Chief 
Financial Officer on 1 September 2015. 

Michael has considerable experience 
in media, being Chief Financial Officer 
of Global Radio, the UK’s largest 
commercial radio group, from June 
2008 to August 2015, and before that 
Group Finance Director at Chrysalis 
Group plc, where he worked from 
1997 to 2008. He has also been Vice 
President – Finance (Europe) for 
Management Consulting Group plc 
and spent seven years with KPMG’s 
London office. He qualified as a 
chartered accountant in 1988.

Michael has decided to take a career 
break after 21 years in senior finance 
roles and has submitted his 
resignation. An executive search is 
underway for the Group’s new CFO. 
In the meantime, Michael continues to 
support the business during his notice 
period. Accordingly, Michael is not 
seeking re-election as a Director.

40

GovernanceJess Burley (51) 
Non-Executive Director

Michael Hartley (68) 
Non-Executive Director

Anne Crompton (40) 
Company Secretary

Jess has over 20 years’ experience  
in media, working previously as the 
Group Managing Director of Hearst in 
the UK, responsible for Hearst Digital 
Media and the National Magazine 
Company portfolio. Jess joined m/SIX 
(the WPP joint venture between 
CHI&Partners and GroupM) as Chief 
Executive Officer in May 2010, bringing 
a wealth of knowledge across all 
media. Jess has also held a number  
of non-executive roles working 
previously with UK Mail Group Plc, the 
fashion retailer Jacques Vert Plc and 
TalkTalk Telecom Plc. She is also a 
trustee of the young people’s charity 
Get Connected. Jess was appointed to 
the Board as a Non-Executive Director 
of Quarto in 2014 and was appointed 
Chairman of the Remuneration 
Committee on 1 December 2016. 

Jess is a member of the Nominations 
and Audit Committees.

Mike was appointed to the Board  
in August 2013 as Senior Independent 
Director and Chair of the Audit 
Committee from May 2014.

Mike brings considerable board and 
international experience and a broad 
knowledge of strategic management. 
He formerly held a series of senior 
executive positions in both retail  
and manufacturing, serving latterly  
as Chief Executive Officer of the 
£800m turnover Viyella division of 
Coats Viyella plc, retiring in 2003.  
He has held a series of non-executive 
roles, including Chairman of Dawson 
International PLC from 2003 to 2009 
and Senior Independent Director of 
ITE Group plc from 2003 to 2014.  
He is currently Chairman of US- 
based Dawson Forte LLP. 

Mike is a member of the Nominations 
and Remuneration Committees.

Anne was appointed in January 2017 
and is also Group Director of Legal 
and Business Affairs.

Anne is responsible for managing and 
safeguarding all our intellectual 
property and contractual processes, 
as well as assisting the Chief Financial 
Officer in managing our risk across 
the Group. She also advises the Board 
and the Senior Leadership Team on 
both regulatory and M&A matters, 
and acts as Secretary to the Board and 
various Board Committees. 

Anne has 10 years of experience as a 
lawyer in the creative industries. She 
joins us from media and entertainment 
group This Is Global Ltd, where she 
had been Head of Legal since 2010. 
She was previously a lawyer with the 
law firm Harbottle & Lewis LLP, where 
she trained. 

41

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOMINATIONS  
COMMITTEE REPORT

The members of the Nominations 
Committee are the Group’s non-
executive Directors, Peter Read 
(Committee Chairman), Michael 
Hartley, and Jess Burley, and the  
Chief Executive Officer, Marcus 
Leaver. A copy of the Committee’s 
formal terms of reference can be 
found on the Company’s website.  
(www.quarto.com)

The search for Board candidates is 
conducted and appointments made, 
on merit, against objective criteria  
and with due regard to the benefits  
of diversity on the Board, including 
gender. External search consultants 
are engaged, as appropriate, and a 
formal and transparent process is 
followed. When dealing with the 
appointment of a successor to the 
Chairman, the senior independent 
non-executive Director will chair the 
Committee instead of the Chairman, 
though in 2016, the meetings held 
regarding the appointment of the 
successor to the Chairman were 
chaired by Tim Chadwick with Michael 
Hartley present.

All Directors are required to allocate 
sufficient time to discharge their 
responsibilities and new Directors 
receive a tailored induction on  
joining the Board. This includes 
presentations on the business, current 
strategy, shareholder expectations, 
and familiarisation with the Group’s 
operations worldwide. Guidance  
is also given on the duties, 
responsibilities and liabilities of a 
Director of a listed company and  
key Board policies and procedures.

The Committee met three times 
during the year and was active,  
under its previous chairman, in my 
appointment as Quarto's new 
Chairman on 24 May 2016. Other 
activities included a review of the 
balance of skills and experience on  
the Board to consider if any changes 
were necessary, a review of the output 
from the annual Board evaluation 
process, and a review of the 
Company’s management structure 
and succession plans.

The Chairman of the Committee 
attends the Annual Meeting to 
address any shareholder questions 
relating to the Committee.

Following the announcement that 
Michael Connole, CFO, has submitted 
his resignation, the Nominations 
Committee on behalf of the Board 
has commenced an executive search 
to identify a suitable replacement. 
Michael continues to support the 
business in the normal course of his 
notice period. The Board thanks 
Michael for the significant changes 
made to the business since his 
appointment and wish him and his 
family the best in the future.

Peter Read 
Chairman of the  
Nominations Committee 
19 April 2017

42

GovernanceAUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

The members of the Audit Committee 
who served throughout the year are 
non-executive Directors Michael Hartley 
(Chairman), Jess Burley. Christopher 
Mills served until the AGM on 24 May 
2016 and Marie Louise Windeler from 
the AGM until 27 September 2016. The 
Board considers Jess Burley, Michael 
Hartley and Marie Louise Windeler to 
be independent Directors. The Board 
considers that Michael Hartley and 
Christopher Mills have recent and 
relevant financial experience and 
together the Committee has a wide range 
of financial and commercial experience 
to fulfil the Committee’s duties.

 – compliance with regulatory and 

legal requirements;

 – detecting fraud.

•  To review the need for an internal 
audit function at least annually.

Committee Meetings
The Committee meets throughout  
the year to fulfil its responsibilities. 
The Committee Chairman also meets 
informally with the Chief Financial 
Officer throughout the year and with 
senior management. He also meets 
with the external Audit Partner from 
time to time to discuss issues and  
be appraised of regulatory change.

Responsibilities
The Committee acts in accordance 
with its terms of reference, and its 
specific responsibilities include:

•  To consider and recommend the 

appointment of the Group’s auditor, 
the audit fee, audit engagement 
letter and questions of auditor 
performance, partner rotation, 
resignation and dismissal.

•  To meet with the auditor to discuss 
all aspects of the audit including 
audit planning, scope, findings, 
accounting policies, management 
judgements and estimates.

•  To review the Board’s 

representation letter to the auditor.

•  To review the auditor’s 
management letter and 
management’s response.

•  To set policy and review the use of 
any non-audit services and assess 
the independence of the auditor.

•  To review financial statements 

released to the public including 
interim and annual financial 
statements.

•  To review the Group’s accounting 
policies, practices and use of 
accounting standards especially  
for decisions requiring major 
elements of judgement, significant 
adjustments, long term viability  
and going concern.

•  To review the Group’s internal 
controls and risk management 
including:
 – the financial reporting process;
 – identifying, managing and 

monitoring financial, operational, 
compliance and other risks;

By invitation the Company’s Chairman 
of the Board, Chief Executive Officer, 
CFO and representatives of the 
Company’s auditor also attend 
Committee meetings although part  
of some meetings are exclusively  
for Committee members without 
executive management present.

The Chairman of the Committee 
attends the Annual Meeting to 
address any shareholder questions 
relating to the Committee.

The Committee met four times  
during 2016 and once in 2017.

The Committee, as part of full Board 
meetings, was also involved in 
approving announcements made to 
the London Stock Exchange.

Activities of the Committee
During 2016 and 2017 to date the work 
of the Committee included:

•  Review of the plan and scope of the 

external audit.

•  Review of the external auditor’s 

report on the 2016 year end audit 
and approval of the preliminary 
announcement and the annual 
report.

•  Recommend to the Board its support 
for management’s recommendation 
for the final and interim dividend.

•  Consider the external auditor’s 

comments in relation to internal 
control and review the need and 
potential scope of internal audit 
functions.

•  Review compliance of the policy 
relating to use of the auditors for 
non-audit work.

•  Review and approval of the interim 
report 2016 after discussion with 
management and the external 
auditor.

•  Discussion of significant accounting 
issues and judgements in the 2016 
accounts as detailed below.

•  Review of the Directors’ viability 

statement.

•  Review of the independence of the 

external auditor.

Performance Evaluation
The Committee assessed its 
performance, constitution and terms 
of reference during 2016 (based 
on a questionnaire completed 
by its members). The Committee 
was deemed by the Board to have 
performed satisfactorily.

Significant Audit risks, key 
findings and financial 
judgements relating  
to year end accounts 2016
The Committee concentrated on the 
following in relation to the 2016 accounts.

Going Concern and Covenant 
Compliance
The Committee considered the 
underlying robustness of the Group’s 
business model, products and 
proposition, and the financial resources 
available to it for the future to satisfy 
itself of the going concern assumption 
in preparing the financial statements.

On finalisation of the 2016 results, 
management identified that the Group 
had failed the Q4 2016 CFADS 
covenant test. This does not imply a 
breach of the bank covenants, providing 
it does not recur. Rigorous analysis of 
future cash flows and covenants was 
performed, together with scenario 
testing and mitigation options, which 
showed forecast compliance. The 
Auditor challenged key assumptions  
in management’s model, performed 
historical forecasting accuracy analysis, 
applied sensitivities and evaluated 
management’s sensitivities, and looked 
at breakeven points on the covenants.

Management consulted with the lead 
bank to ensure that they concurred 
that it is appropriate to exclude 
certain items as exceptional items 

43

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

when calculating covenant 
compliance. This confirmation was 
reviewed by the Auditor.

The Committee noted these matters, 
including the significant control 
observations on this area, and the 
forecast compliance with the facility’s 
covenants for the foreseeable future.

Accounting for the potential 
Books & Gifts Direct ('BGD') 
disposal
The Group has been seeking to dispose 
of the Australia and New Zealand BGD 
businesses. Heads of Terms were signed 
post year end. The Australia business 
sale contract exchanged on 27 March 
and completed on 31 March. New 
Zealand discussions remain on-going.

Management have disclosed additional 
information on the income statement 
to show separately the results of BGD 
and the other businesses, as they 
believe this supplementary information 
was more useful for the reader.

They have also shown within exceptional 
items $6.2m impairment of BGD 
goodwill and intangible assets as well as 
a write down of certain current assets 
totalling $8.0m given the size and 
non-recurring nature of these items.

The Audit Committee and Auditor 
concluded this treatment and 
presentation to be reasonable.

Inventory accounting and prior 
year adjustment
During the year end processes and in 
preparing due diligence for the intended 
transaction, management identified an 
error, as a result of control failings, in the 
BGD Australia accounts for the stock in 
transit of $3.5m relating to cut-off 
errors and errors in accounting for 
inventory returns which related to the 
current year income statement and prior 
years. After management analysis and 
adjustment, the component audit team 
performed extensive testing on this 
balance and on the creditors and 
purchase clearing accounts. The testing 
identified further errors which 
management corrected with the total 
impact of adjustments identified and 
recorded as per Note 1 in the accounts.

Acquisition accounting
During 2016, the Group acquired 
becker&mayer and Harvard Common 
Press, both in the US. Management 
prepared opening fair value balance 
sheets with both being treated as a 
business combination within the scope 
of IFRS3. Management also used 
external valuation specialists to value 
the acquired intangibles within the 
acquisition.

in Note 11. No impairment provision  
for the publishing businesses 
was required.

The Committee noted the continued 
sensitivity of the CGU to reasonably 
possible changes in key assumptions 
and confirmed the appropriateness of 
the continued disclosure of this.

Goodwill relating to BGD was impaired 
by $6.0m as detailed above.

The Auditor assessed the nature 
of the transaction, reviewed the 
purchase agreements, assessed the 
acquisition accounting, engaged their 
valuation experts to assess the work 
of management’s external expert 
and audited the acquired assets 
and liabilities.

Failings in financial reporting controls 
were identified across the two 
acquisitions with material reclassification 
adjustments identified to the opening 
balance sheets. The identified errors 
have been corrected by management 
in the 2016 accounts.

The Committee reviewed the results 
and management’s methodology and 
discussed the testing performed by 
the Auditor to provide comfort that 
any estimates used in the preparation 
of the balance sheets were reasonable.

Assessment of the carrying 
value of Goodwill
Goodwill arising from acquisitions is 
stated at cost less any accumulated 
impairment losses. In accordance with 
IAS 36 the Group tests the goodwill 
on an annual basis for impairment.

Failings in financial reporting controls 
arose as the Auditor identified errors 
in the determination of the value in 
use and headroom resulting in a 
material reduction in the disclosed 
headroom following corrections 
made by management.

The Committee reviewed the final 
methodology and assumptions used 
in the testing process with focus on 
both the discount rate and growth 
rates used in the discounted cash  
flow valuations and the sensitivity  
to changes in the discount rate and 
growth rate. Further detail is set out 

Recoverability of  
pre-publication costs
Amortisation of pre-publication costs 
is charged to the income statement on 
a straight line basis over the estimated 
useful lives of the intangible assets. 
Pre-publication costs are capitalised 
in accordance with IAS 38 and the 
Committee, with the external auditor, 
discussed the assumptions behind 
the amortisation profile including the 
amortisation period of the publications. 
Further detail is set out in Note 15.

In 2016, management amended their 
estimate of the useful life of certain 
assets to better reflect the expected 
useful life of the assets. The changes 
had the effect of increasing operating 
profit by $2.1m following the 
prospective application of the change 
in lives from the start of the year. The 
Committee noted the effect of this on 
the Income Statement. The Auditor 
reviewed the presentation and 
concurred with management’s 
treatment of these changes to the 
estimates prospectively under IAS8.

Exceptional items
The Committee, in consultation with 
the Auditor, considered the latest 
regulatory guidelines issued by the 
FRC in December 2013 and agreed 
with the Executive Directors to restrict 
exceptional items to significant items 
outside the scope of normal business 
that need to be disclosed by virtue 
of their size or incidence. This has 
been applied consistently from 2014.

For the 2016 accounts, there have 
been significant exceptional items in 
relation to BGD. These have included 
items relating to impairment of 
goodwill and intangibles of $6.2m 
as well as $8.0m relating to the 

44

Governancewrite-down of assets including 
receivables and inventory. These have 
been included within Exceptional items 
due to their scale and one-off nature 
rather than being non-trading items. 
Further detail is set out in Note 5.

Revenue recognition and sales 
returns
The Committee considered the risk 
that revenue may not be captured in 
the relevant period. Apart from the 
usual risks relating to the timing of 
revenue recognition, management are 
required to provide for returns, which 
may be made subsequent to the 
period end. This requires a significant 
degree of judgement as management 
assesses sales returns through 
quantifying the previous returns 
experience and post year end returns. 

The Committee reviewed 
management’s methodology, and 
discussed the procedures followed to 
ensure that revenue was booked into 
the correct period in line with the 
stated accounting policies and that 
returns provisions were reasonable.

Inventory provisioning
The economics of manufacturing and 
wholesaling of books in the publishing 
businesses inherently leads to 
substantial inventories. Most of these 
are not printed without guaranteed 
sales so there is a degree of 
judgement as to the provisions 
required to hold this inventory at the 
lower of cost or net realisable value.

The Committee reviewed 
managements’ methodology and 
discussed the testing performed by 
the Auditor to provide comfort that 
these estimates were reasonable.

For BGD, management booked 
substantial inventory provisions within 
exceptional items to best reflect the 
estimated recoverable values from the 
transaction and without a long term 
trading future.

Receivables provisioning
Trade receivables is inherently a 
critical accounting estimate in relation 
to the risk of non recoverability of 
trade receivables. The Committee has 
discussed and challenged the overall 
receivables position and considered 
the reasonableness of the level 
of provisioning. The Committee 
noted the much-reduced level of 
overdue receivables in the publishing 
and printing businesses.

and substantial provisions were 
booked within exceptional items, 
also taking into account the 
estimated recoverable values from 
the transaction.

Non-Audit services
Deloitte provided agreed upon 
procedures in respect of the interim 
financial statements at a fee of £5,000 
(2015: £5,000).

External Audit
The Committee assesses the 
effectiveness of its external auditor 
through on-going dialogue and 
communication with the Auditor. The 
audit cycle included formal meetings. 
The audit planning meeting, which 
happens prior to the audit, was when 
the Committee discussed reporting 
developments, significant accounting 
risks, the new requirements in relation 
to the viability statement and other 
Corporate Governance Code changes, 
improvement in relation to risk 
management and internal control and 
controls in the accounting process.

At the end of the audit process, the 
Committee met with the auditors to 
receive their report on the key findings 
with focus on identified key audit risks, 
any misstatements in management’s 
initial accounts and to consider areas 
of judgement and estimates.

The Auditor showed diligence and 
openness with the Committee during 
meetings and through written 
communication and during intermediate 
briefing sessions with the Chair of the 
Audit Committee. The Auditor gave 
the Committee forthright views on 
judgement areas whilst recognising 
that the decisions lay with the 
Committee. The Committee also 
received feedback from the Executive 
Directors involved with the audit. 
The Committee is satisfied with the 
Auditor’s effectiveness in 2016.

Appointment and independence
Deloitte was appointed the Group’s 
auditor in December 2014 and as 
auditor to the UK and US subsidiaries. 
Deloitte member firms were also 
appointed auditor of the Australian, 
Hong Kong and New Zealand 
subsidiaries in 2015.

The Committee considers the 
appointment of the external auditor 
each year and considers the 
performance of the lead audit partner 
and the audit manager during the 
audit process.

A tender process for the Company’s 
audit was last completed in early 
2014. There are no restrictions on the 
Committee’s choice of external auditor.

Internal Audit 
The Committee reviews the 
appropriateness of having an internal 
audit function. To date there has not 
been a separate internal audit function, 
given the size and scale of the Group’s 
operations. However, in 2016, the 
Committee started to implement 
more formalisation of the internal 
review using a set list of required 
internal control tasks with reports on 
these items coming to the Committee 
for review.

This intermediate step towards an 
internal audit function has proved to 
be ineffective. Whilst senior members 
of the financial management 
performed internal audits, the reports 
have not been published timeously, 
and the remote locations coupled 
with the additional pressures on 
management time in the current year 
resulted in insufficient follow up to the 
problems identified.

The year-end audit identified a 
number of errors. These were mostly 
BGD trading accounting, acquisition 
accounting and goodwill impairment 
testing. The operations accounting 
within the publishing businesses was 
generally found to be adequate.

In view of the lack of real progress 
on internal control and the issues 
identified during the audit, the 
Committee intends to install some 
form of dedicated internal audit 
resource, which will report internal 
audit matters direct to the Committee.

The Committee notes that most of 
the items identified in 2015 have been 
adequately progressed, particularly 
in the operational finance functions in 
the US and the UK. However, the scale 
of accounting errors in 2016 and the 
need for another restatement of the 
accounts highlights the need for much 
improved financial management. 
The Committee has highlighted 
these concerns to the Board and in 
conjunction with the CEO, action 
is being taken to address identified 
shortcomings.

In BGD, trading in the final months 
of 2016 deteriorated sharply for 
our master franchisee customers 

For the 2016 audit of the Group and 
the Company’s accounts, Deloitte was 
paid £442,400 (2015: £266,600).

Michael Hartley
Chairman of the Audit Committee 
19 April 2017 

45

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016REMUNERATION  
COMMITTEE REPORT

Annual Statement

Dear shareholder
I am pleased to present the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 December 2016, which has been 
prepared by the Committee and approved by the Board.

For the year ended 31 December 2016, there were no substantial changes in Directors’ remuneration arrangements.

This is the Company’s fourth year of reporting in line with The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups 
(Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013. 

The report is divided into two sections:

The first is Quarto’s Remuneration Policy recommended by the Board, which will apply from 16 May 2017 subject to 
approval at the 2017 Annual Meeting. The proposed policy mirrors the existing policy first implemented on 23 May 2014, 
save for the annual bonus threshold which is 2% growth in profit with stretch target of 10% (previously 3% threshold 
with stretch target of 10%). 

During the first quarter of 2017, the Committee has worked with Smith & Williamson LLP on remuneration 
benchmarking and reviewing Committee procedures. Following this exercise the Committee and the Board will 
consider appropriate amendments to the Remuneration Policy during 2017.

The second section is the Annual Report on Remuneration, which reviews how the existing policy has been 
implemented.

Performance Evaluation
The Committee assessed its performance, constitution and terms of reference during 2016 (based on a questionnaire 
completed by its members). The Committee was deemed by the Board to have performed satisfactorily. 

In line with The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Group’s (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 
2013 the following parts of the Annual Report on Remuneration are audited: the single total figure of remuneration for 
each director, including annual bonus outcomes for the financial year ended 31 December 2016; pension entitlements; 
and, directors’ shareholdings and share interests. All other parts of the Directors’ Remuneration Report are unaudited.

I would be happy to receive any comments you may have on this report. I hope you find the report clear and 
comprehensive and that it helps demonstrate how remuneration is linked to the performance of the company,  
and that you are able to support the resolutions on remuneration being presented at this year’s Annual Meeting. 

Jess Burley
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee 
19 April 2017

46

GovernanceCommittee meeting attendance 2016

Committee membership

Jess Burley (Chair from 21 December 2016)

Mike Hartley (Chair until 21 December 2016)

Peter Read

Tim Chadwick (resigned 24 May 2016)

Christopher Mills (resigned 24 May 2016)

Number of meetings held during the year: 4

4 of 4

4 of 4

2 of 2

2 of 2

1 of 2

During 2016 the Remuneration Committee (‘the Committee’) held four meetings. During 2017 the Committee has held 
3 meetings, and met for 1 presentation by appointed Remuneration Consultants, Smith & Williamson LLP. 

Marie Louise Windeler was appointed to the Board and the Committee on 24 May 2016 and resigned on 27 September 
2016 due to health reasons. She had been appointed as the Chair of the committee but no meetings were held during 
her period of appointment.

The Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and the Group Director of People have also been invited to attend 
parts of some Committee meetings. No individual is permitted to participate in any matter concerning details of their 
own remuneration. 

Policy 
This section sets out Quarto’s Remuneration Policy for Directors which is recommended by the Board for approval at 
the 2017 Annual Meeting. The Group’s principal remuneration policy aim is to ensure that the Executive Directors’ 
remuneration is designed to promote the long-term success of the Company. 

Performance related elements are designed to be transparent, stretching and are rigorously applied.

In formulating its policies the Committee had regard to and balanced the following factors:

a) the need to align the interests of the executive with those of the shareholders;

b) the performance of the individual executive and of the Group as a whole;

c) the remuneration practice in the markets in which the executive is principally based; and,

d) the remuneration packages offered to executives in companies competing in the same markets and industry as the 
Group, but exercising caution, in view of the risk of an upward ratchet of remuneration levels with no corresponding 
improvement in corporate and individual performance. 

47

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016  
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Quarto’s remuneration policy summary

FIXED PAY

Element of 
Remuneration

Purpose and  
link to strategy

Base Salary/ 
Fees

Set at competitive 
levels in the markets 
in which Quarto 
operates, in order 
to attract and 
retain executives.

Benefits

Designed to be 
competitive in the 
market in which the 
individual is employed.

Operation

Opportunity

Performance metrics

Reviewed annually with 
changes normally effective 
from 1 January of each year.

Reviews take account of:

•  scope of the role and the 
markets in which Quarto 
operates;

•  performance and 
experience of the 
individual;

•  pay levels at organisations 

of a similar size and 
complexity; and,
•  pay and conditions 

elsewhere in the Group.

Benefits include life insurance 
and private medical 
insurance. Where 
appropriate, other benefits 
may be offered including, but 
not limited to, participation in 
all- employee share schemes.

Benefits are non-pensionable.

Not applicable.

There is no prescribed  
maximum to avoid setting 
unhelpful expectations. Any 
salary increases are applied in 
line with the outcome of the 
review and taking into account 
wider factors, for example, 
local market inflation.

Not applicable.

Benefits vary by role and 
individual circumstance 
and eligibility is reviewed 
periodically. 

Benefits are not anticipated  
to exceed 5% of salary p.a.  
over the period for which 
this policy applies. 

The Committee retains  
the discretion to approve a 
higher cost in exceptional 
circumstances (e.g. relocation) 
or in circumstances where 
factors outside of the Group’s 
control have materially 
changed (e.g. increases 
in medical premiums).

Pension

To provide cost  
effective retirement 
benefits.

Participation in defined 
contribution plan or cash 
allowance in lieu.

Up to 15% of base salary.

Not applicable.

48

GovernanceVARIABLE PAY

Element of 
Remuneration

Purpose and  
link to strategy

Annual 
performance 
bonus

Designed to 
reinforce individual 
performance and 
contribution to the 
achievement of profit 
growth and strategic 
objectives.

Medium-term 
performance 
bonus

Designed to reinforce 
the achievement of 
continuous profit 
growth over a longer 
time frame and aid 
staff retention.

Operation

Opportunity

Performance metrics

Maximum potential opportunity  
of up to 60% of base salary.

Typically, 10-15% of potential  
is achieved for Threshold 
performance of the financial  
goals and 100% for Stretching 
performance.

Maximum potential opportunity 
of up to 120% of base salary for 
the three year period.

Typically, 10% of potential is 
achieved for achieving 
Threshold performance and 
100% for Stretching 
performance.

At least half of the 
annual bonus is based 
on financial objectives 
with the balance on 
personal objectives.

The Committee will 
vary the weightings 
from year-to-year to 
reflect the changing 
strategic needs for the 
business with a default 
bias towards financial 
objectives.

In exceptional 
circumstances, the 
Committee has the 
ability to exercise 
discretion to override 
the formulaic bonus 
outcome within  
the limits of the Plan 
where it believes 
the outcome is not 
truly reflective of 
performance and to 
ensure fairness to both 
shareholders and 
participants.

The medium-term 
bonus is based entirely 
on cumulative 
increases in earnings 
and is only paid at the 
end of the three year 
period based on the 
cumulative result.

In exceptional 
circumstances, the 
Committee has the 
ability to exercise 
discretion to override 
the formulaic bonus 
outcome within the 
limits of the Plan where 
it believes the outcome 
is not truly reflective 
of performance and 
to ensure fairness 
to both shareholders 
and participants.

Measures are reviewed prior 
to the start of the financial 
year to ensure they remain 
appropriate and reinforce 
the business strategy, and 
performance targets are set 
annually to ensure they are 
appropriately stretching 
and reflect those strategic 
objectives. At the end of 
the year the Committee 
determines the extent to 
which these were achieved.

Awards are payable in cash.

Payments made under the 
annual bonus are subject to 
claw-back for the later of 
one year following the date 
of award or the completion 
of the next audit of the 
Group’s accounts, in the 
event of a fraud or material 
misstatement of results being 
identified in relation to the 
year in which the bonus is 
earned.

Measures are reviewed prior 
to the start of each three year 
period to ensure they remain 
appropriate and to ensure 
they are appropriately 
stretching. At the end of the 
three year period the 
Committee determines the 
extent to which these were 
achieved.

Awards are payable in cash.

Payments made under the 
medium-term bonus are 
subject to claw-back for the 
later of one year following 
the date of award or the 
completion of the next audit 
of the Group’s accounts, 
in the event of a fraud or 
material misstatement of 
results being identified in 
relation to the year in which 
the bonus is earned.

49

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

VARIABLE PAY

Element of 
Remuneration

Purpose and  
link to strategy

Performance 
Share Plan 
(PSP)

Ensures that the 
Executive’s interests 
are aligned with those 
of shareholders 
through reward for 
providing shareholders 
with substantial 
increases in 
shareholder value and/
or for achievement of a 
measure of sustained 
growth in earnings 
over the medium to 
long term.

FIXED PAY

Non-executive 
Directors’ fees 

To reflect the time 
commitment in 
preparing for and 
attending meetings,  
the duties and 
responsibilities of 
the role and the 
contribution expected 
from the Non-
executive Directors.

Operation

Opportunity

Performance metrics

Award opportunities for 
participants are up to 50%  
of base salary.

Awards of up to 100% of  
base salary may be provided  
in exceptional circumstances  
(e.g. recruitment).

20% of maximum vests for 
Threshold, rising on a straight-
line basis to full vesting for 
Stretch performance.

Awards to Executives  
are subject to four  
year cumulative 
earnings per share 
(EPS) and/or total 
shareholder return 
(TSR) performance.

In exceptional 
circumstances, the 
Committee has the 
ability to exercise 
discretion to override 
the formulaic PSP 
outcome within the 
Plan limits to ensure 
alignment of pay 
with the underlying 
performance of the 
business during the 
performance period.

Not applicable

There is no prescribed 
maximum. Non-executive 
Director fee increases are 
applied in line with the outcome 
of the review and taking into 
account wider factors, for 
example, inflation.

Awards of nominal-cost  
(or nil-cost) options may  
be granted annually as a 
percentage of base salary. 
Vesting is based on 
performance measured over 
four years. The performance 
period normally starts at the 
beginning of the financial  
year in which the date of 
grant falls.

Dividends accrue on PSP 
awards and are paid on those 
shares which vest. Award 
levels and performance 
conditions are reviewed 
before each award cycle 
to ensure they remain 
appropriate.

Payments made under the 
PSP are subject to claw-back, 
for the later of one year 
following date of vesting or 
completion of the next audit 
of the Group’s accounts, 
in the event of a fraud or 
material misstatement of 
results being identified in 
relation to the years in 
which the PSP is earned.

Annual fee for Chair.

Annual base fee for  
non-executive Directors. 
Additional fees are paid  
to the Senior Independent 
Director and the Chair of  
the Committees to reflect 
additional responsibilities.

Fees are reviewed annually, 
taking into account time 
commitment, responsibilities 
and fees paid by comparable 
companies.

50

GovernancePerformance measure selection and approach to target setting
The measures used under the annual bonus plan are selected annually to reflect the Group’s key strategic priorities for 
the year and reinforce financial performance and achievement of annual objectives as well as individual performance. 
Financial measures include, but may not be limited to, profit before tax.

The Committee considers that profit before tax adjusted for any exceptional items is the most appropriate measure  
of long-term performance of the Group. It is well-aligned with shareholder interests, provides clear visibility and the 
scheme is simple.

Performance targets are set at such a level as to be stretching and achievable, with regard to the particular strategic 
priorities and economic environment. The annual bonus threshold is based on a 2% growth in profits with Stretch target 
being 10% growth. The same basis is used for the medium-term bonus where the targets compound annually.

The Committee reviews the performance targets applying to awards made to the proposed PSP scheme annually. 
Awards made to participants will be based on either one or a combination of total shareholder return and cumulative 
earnings per share over the measured period. These will be reported on each year in the Annual Report on Remuneration.

Differences in remuneration policy operated for other employees
Quarto’s approach to annual salary reviews is consistent across the Group. Key management personnel and senior 
managers with substantial operational responsibilities are eligible to participate in an annual and, in certain cases, the 
medium-term bonus scheme with similar metrics to those used for the Chief Executive Officer. Opportunities and specific 
performance conditions vary by organisational level with business area-specific metrics incorporated where appropriate.

Key management personnel and senior managers are eligible to participate in the PSP. Performance conditions are 
consistent for all these participants, while award opportunities may vary by organisational level but are typically limited 
to 50% of base salary.

Shareholding guidelines
The Committee recognises the importance of aligning the interests of Executives with shareholders through the building 
up of a significant shareholding in the Group. Save for the initial award made to Marcus Leaver in May 2014, Executive 
Directors are required to retain shares of a value equal to 50% of the after-tax gain made on the vesting of awards under 
the Plans, until they have built up a minimum shareholding of a value equivalent to at least 100% of annual base salary.

Remuneration policy for new directors
When hiring or appointing a new executive director, including by way of internal promotion, the Committee may make 
use of all the existing components of remuneration as follows:

Component:

Base Salary

Benefits

Pension

Annual Bonus

Medium-Term 
Bonus

PSP

Approach

Maximum 
Value

Determined in line 
with the stated 
policy, and taking 
into account their 
previous salary. 
Initial salaries may 
be set below market 
and consideration 
given to phasing 
any increases 
over two or three 
years subject to 
development in 
the role.

Not applicable

In line with 
the stated 
policy.

In line with 
the stated 
policy.

In line with stated 
policy, with the 
relevant maximum 
pro-rated to reflect 
the proportion of 
the year served.

In line with stated 
policy, with the 
relevant maximum 
pro-rated to reflect 
the proportion of 
the year served.

In line with the 
stated policy.

Not 
applicable

Not 
applicable

60% of base salary

120% of base salary 
over three years

100% of base 
salary (200%  
in exceptional 
circumstances)

51

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

In determining appropriate remuneration for a new executive, the Committee will take into consideration all relevant 
factors (including quantum, nature of remuneration and the jurisdiction from which the candidate was recruited) to 
ensure that arrangements are in the best interests of both The Quarto Group and its shareholders. The Committee 
may consider it appropriate to grant an award under a structure not included in the policy, for example to ‘buy out’ 
incentive arrangements forfeited on leaving a previous employer, and will exercise the discretion available under Listing  
Rule 9.4.2 R where necessary. In doing so, the Committee will consider relevant factors including the expected value 
of all outstanding equity awards using a Monte Carlo, Black-Scholes, or other relevant equivalent valuation and, where 
applicable, taking into account toughness of performance conditions attached to these awards and the likelihood of 
those conditions being met.

In cases of appointing a new Executive Director by way of internal promotion, the Group will honour any contractual 
commitments made prior to their promotion to Executive Director.

In cases of appointing a new non-executive Director, the approach will be consistent with the policy.

Service contracts and exit payments policy
Non-executive Directors are engaged on the basis of a letter of appointment. In line with the UK Corporate Governance 
Code, all Directors are subject to re-election annually at the Annual Meeting. 

The Chair, Peter Read, was appointed on 24 May 2016 with an initial one year contract, subject to review prior to 24 May 
2017. The Chair, together with the other non-executive Directors, have a one month notice period, and are subject to 
re-election each year. 

The non-executive Director Letters of Appointment are available to view at the Group’s registered office and the 
effective dates of their Letters of Appointment are as follows:

Director

Peter Read

Jess Burley

Mike Hartley

Date of Appointment

Notice period

24 May 2016 (coincident with the 2016 AGM)

1 month

22 May 2014

6 August 2013

1 month

1 month

Executive Director service contracts have no fixed term and have a notice period of not more than 12 months from 
either the Executive or the Group. These notice periods meet best practice guidelines and give protection, mutually, to 
the Group and the Executive. Executive Director service contracts are available to view at the Group’s registered office. 
The dates of the Executive Director service contracts and the relevant notice period are as follows:

Director

Effective date of contract

Marcus Leaver

30 April 2012

Michael Connole

1 September 2015

Notice period

12 months

12 months (resignation submitted 30 March 2017)

52

GovernanceThe Committee’s policy is to limit severance payments on termination to pre-established contractual arrangements and 
the rules of the relevant incentive plans. In doing so, the Committee’s objective is to avoid rewarding poor performance. 
Furthermore, the Committee will take account of the Executive Director’s duty to mitigate their loss.

Termination payments are limited to base salary and benefits during the unexpired notice period which cannot  
be mitigated.

No payments to past Directors or payments for loss of office were made during the year ended 31 December 2016.

In addition to the contractual provisions regarding payment on termination set out above, the Group’s incentive plans 
and share schemes contain provisions for termination of employment.

Component

Annual bonus

Medium-term bonus

PSP

Bad leaver

Good leaver

Change-of-control

No annual  
bonus payable

Eligible for an award 
to the extent that 
performance 
conditions have  
been satisfied and 
pro-rated for the 
proportion of the 
financial year served, 
with Committee 
discretion to treat 
otherwise

Eligible for an award 
to the extent that 
performance 
conditions have  
been satisfied up to 
the change of control 
and pro-rated for the 
proportion of the 
financial year served, 
with Committee 
discretion to treat 
otherwise

No annual bonus payable

Outstanding awards are forfeited

Eligible for an award to the extent that 
performance conditions have been 
satisfied and pro-rated for the proportion 
of the three financial years served, with 
Committee discretion to treat otherwise

Outstanding awards will normally continue 
and be tested for performance over the full 
period, and pro-rated for time based on 
the proportion of the period served, with 
Committee discretion to treat otherwise

Eligible for an award to the extent that 
performance conditions have been 
satisfied up to the change of control and 
pro-rated for the proportion of the three 
financial years served, with Committee 
discretion to treat otherwise

Outstanding awards will normally vest and 
be tested for performance over the period 
to change-of-control, and pro-rated for 
time based on the proportion of the period 
served, with Committee discretion to treat 
otherwise

Any commitment made prior to, but due to be fulfilled after the policy comes into force, will be honoured.

An individual would normally be considered a good leaver if they leave for reasons of death, injury, ill-health, disability, 
redundancy, part of the business in which the individual is employed or engaged ceasing to be a member of the Group, 
circumstances that are considered by the Committee to be retirement, or any other reason as the Committee decides. 
Bad leaver provisions apply under other circumstances.

External appointments
The Executive Directors may accept external appointments with the prior approval of the Board and provided only that 
such appointments do not prejudice the individual’s ability to fulfil their duties at the Group. Whether any related fees 
are retained by the individual or remitted to the Group will be considered on a case-by-case basis.

Illustration of the application of the remuneration policy
The chart on page 54 shows the remuneration that the Executive Directors could be expected to obtain based on 
varying performance scenarios. Illustrations are intended to provide further information to shareholders regarding the 
relationship between pay and performance.

Potential reward opportunities illustrated are based on the remuneration policy presented for shareholder approval  
at the Annual Meeting on 16 May 2017, applied to the latest known fixed pay of base salaries, pension, other benefits  
and variable pay of annual bonus, medium term bonus and PSP. To better illustrate the annual potential remuneration, 
the medium-term bonus potential and PSP Awards are pro-rated to an annual equivalent. All remuneration is contracted 
in sterling.

No illustration is presented for Michael Connole due to his resignation submitted on 30 March 2017. An executive search 
has commenced to identify a suitable replacement. Michael will step down as a director later in 2017, until that time he 
will be eligible for his full salary, benefits and pension.

53

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS APPLICATION OF REMUNERATION POLICY

US$
16
1,400

1,200

1,000

800

600

400

200

0

583

100%

Min

Marcus Leaver

1,010
12%
12%

18%

58%

Performing in line
with expectations

1,294
16%

16%

23%

45%

Max

Fixed

Annual variable

MTIP

PSP

In illustrating the application of the remuneration policy the following assumptions have been made:

Minimum performance Basic salary, pension or cash in lieu of pension and benefits. No bonus and no vesting of the PSP.

In line with expectation Basic salary, pension or cash in lieu of pension and benefits. Bonus payout at 60% of the 

maximum bonus. PSP vesting at 60% of maximum vesting.

Maximum

Basic salary, pension or cash in lieu of pension and benefits. Bonus payout at 100%. 
Full vesting of the PSP.

Consideration of conditions elsewhere in the Group
When reviewing and setting executive remuneration, the Committee takes into account the pay and employment 
conditions of all employees of the Group. The Group-wide pay review budget is one of the key factors when reviewing 
the salaries of the Executive Directors.

The Group has not carried out a formal employee consultation regarding Board remuneration, though it does comply 
with local regulations and practices regarding employee consultation more broadly.

Consideration of shareholder views
It is the Committee’s policy to consult with major shareholders or their chosen shareholder representative body prior 
to any changes to its Executive Director remuneration structure.

Jess Burley
Chair of the Remuneration Committee  
19 April 2017

54

GovernanceANNUAL REPORT  
ON REMUNERATION

The Remuneration Committee
The Committee’s Terms of Reference are available on the Group’s website.

The Committee is responsible for:

•  Recommending to the Board the remuneration and terms and conditions of employment 

of the Chair, Executive Directors and key members of senior management;

•  Measuring subsequent performance as a prelude to determining the Executive Directors’  

and key managers’ total remuneration on behalf of the whole Board;

•  Determining the structure and quantum of short-term and medium-term bonus schemes; and,
•  Granting awards under the PSP Share Award Scheme.

The main issues discussed and/or approved during the financial year under review:

•  Approval of the prior year Directors’ Remuneration Report;
•  Annual review of the Executive Directors’ salaries and benefits;
•  Review of the Executive Directors’ and the senior managers’ performance under the prior year’s annual bonus 

scheme, including a review of their performance against their personal objectives and approval of the bonus awards;

•  Review of the design and targets for the forthcoming annual bonus scheme, including personal objectives;
•  Approval of awards made in the year under the Performance Share Plan; and
•  Approval of terms for new senior management appointments falling within the remit of the Committee.

Advisors
The Committee has not paid fees to any advisors during 2016. During 2017 the Committee has paid fees of £31,800 to 
Smith & Williamson LLP.

Statement of shareholder voting at the 2016 annual meeting
The following table shows the results of the advisory vote on the 2015 Annual Remuneration Report at the 
Annual Meeting on 24 May 2016.

For (including discretionary)

Against

Total votes cast

Withheld

Total 
number of 
votes

% of  

votes cast

8,869,928

99.99%

1,000

8,870,928

8,000

0.01%

100%

–

The following table shows the results of the vote on the proposal to amend the performance conditions  
relating to grants under the Performance Share Plan, at the Annual Meeting on 24 May 2016.

For (including discretionary)

Against

Total votes cast

Withheld 

Total 
number of 
votes

% of  

votes cast

8,673,524

97.81%

194,404

8,867,928

11,000

2.19%

100%

–

55

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

Single total figure of remuneration (audited)
The table below sets out a single figure for the total remuneration received by each Director for the year ended 
31 December 2016 and the prior year. These amounts are shown in the reporting currency, although set in sterling.  
The exchange rates used in 2016 and 2015 were 1.35 and 1.53, respectively.

Executive Directors

Marcus Leaver

Michael Connole

Bob Morley*

Base Salary

Benefits1

Pension

Annual Bonus2

Long-term 
incentives3

Total 
remuneration

2016 
$’000

2015 
$’000

2016 
$’000

2015 
$’000

2016 
$’000

2015 
$’000

2016 
$’000

2015 
$’000

2016 
$’000

2015 
$’000

2016 
$’000

2015 
$’000

488

324

17

536

122

258

6

5

–

8

2

21

73

49

–

80

18

–

34

305

2,651

–

–

59

–

–

–

–

–

–

3,252

378

17

929

201

279

Fees4

Benefits

Pension

Annual Bonus

Long-term 
incentives3

Total 
remuneration

Non-executive Directors

2016
$’000

2015
$’000

2016
$’000

2015
$’000

2016
$’000

2015
$’000

2016
$’000

2015
$’000

2016
$’000

2015
$’000

2016
$’000

2015
$’000

Peter Read*

Mike Hartley

Jess Burley

Tim Chadwick*

Christopher Mills*

Marie Louise Windeler*

57

60

48

54

19

19

–

69

54

153

54

0

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

57

60

48

54

19

19

–

69

54

153

54

–

*  For period for which he/she was a Director/Non-executive Director.
1  Benefits comprise private medical insurance contributions.
2  Annual bonus for performance over the relevant financial year. Further details can be found on page 60.
3   On 31 March 2016, Marcus Leaver’s Performance Share Plan award of 666,666 shares vested and were capable to being exercised at any time 
after 30 June 2016. On 9 August 2016 the options were exercised and the shares were transferred to Marcus Leaver out of treasury stock. 
The closing mid-market price on that date was £2.64. Upon exercise of the options, he was also entitled to a dividend equivalent payment in 
respect of dividends paid from 31 December 2012 and 9 August 2016, subject to withholdings tax and National Insurance contributions. The 
dividend equivalent payment was £203,890.

4   Details of non-executive Directors’ fees can be found on page 60. 

56

GovernanceExecutive Directors

Marcus Leaver

Michael Connole

Non-executive Directors

Peter Read

Jess Burley2

Mike Hartley

Tim Chadwick

Christopher Mills

Marie-Louise Windeler

Directors’ shareholdings
The share interests of the Directors who held office at 31 December 2016 and of their connected persons in the share 
capital of the Company are shown below:

Number of share
options of common stock

Number of US$0.10
shares of common stock

31 December  

31 December  

31 December  

31 December  

2016

241,214

108,980

2015

750,398

60,000

2016

393,500

15,423

2015

14,000

10,000

Number of US$0.10
shares of common stock

31 December  

31 December  

20161

10,000

3,300

10,000

–

–

–

20151

–

3,300

10,000

–

100,000

–

Price at 
exercise 
date

£2.64

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

1   Or date of appointment.
2   Jess Burley purchased 4,055 shares on 4 April 2017.

During the year the market price of the shares of common stock ranged between 221p and 310p. 

The mid-market price at 31 December 2016 was 304p.

Directors’ Share Options
Shares: Common Stock of $0.10 each

Date of grant

As at 
1 January 
2016

Granted

Exercised

As at
31 December
2016

Face value 
at date of 
grant
(£’000)

Fair value 
at date of 
grant
(£’000)

Marcus Leaver

22/04/2014

666,666

24/09/2015

83,732

–

–

19/04/2016

4/08/2016

–

–

73,750

83,732

(666,666)

–

–

–

750,398

157,482

(666,666)

Michael Connole

24/09/2015

60,000

19/04/2016

–

60,000

–

48,980

48,980

–

–

–

–

83,732

73,750

83,732

241,214

60,000

48,980

108,980

1,133

175

181

175

125

120

153

239

187

239

171

124

All awards under the PSP schemes have a 4 year vesting period. For the option grant on 22 April 2014 to Marcus Leaver 
shareholder approval was gained at the Annual Meeting held on 22 May 2014 to amend the vesting terms to 30 June 2016.

57

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

Executive director base salaries/fees
During the year, Marcus Leaver, the Chief Executive Officer, received £361,375 in salary. His salary was increased 
by 3.25% for 2017. This was set in line with the typical increase across the good performing UK employee population. 

The next salary review date will be 1 January 2018.

During the year, Michael Connole, the Chief Financial Officer, was paid £240,000 in salary in line with his contract  
on appointment dated 1 September 2015. 

During the year, Bob Morley, the Deputy Chair, received £12,500 in salary. Bob Morley resigned on 31 March 2016. 

Pension and other benefits
The Group makes a contribution to the personal pension schemes of Marcus Leaver and Michael Connole equal to 15% 
of their base salary which may, at their discretion, be taken as cash in line with the policy. Benefits are in line with the policy.

Annual performance bonus
2016 bonus framework
For the 2016 financial year, the maximum annual bonus opportunity was 60% of salary for Marcus Leaver and 
50% for Michael Connole.

The annual bonus opportunity was split between targeted growth in adjusted profit before tax and other financial and 
personal goals. 45% of total bonus potential for Marcus Leaver and 42.5% for Michael Connole is based on growth in 
adjusted profit before tax. The balance is based on achievement of personal objectives.

The adjusted group profit before tax target was based on the 2015 actual result, adjusted upwards to reflect the 
becker&mayer and Harvard Common Press acquisitions giving a Threshold of $15.65m and a Stretch of $16.72m.

The actual adjusted profit before tax for the year for bonus purposes was $14.5m and thus neither the Threshold nor  
the Stretch targets were exceeded and no bonus is payable in respect of this element of the overall annual bonus for 
both Marcus Leaver and Michael Connole.

Personal objectives for Marcus Leaver and Michael Connole were set by the Committee in discussion with the Chairman. 
For both executive directors, personal objectives included both financial and non financial criteria with 15% of salary 
potentially payable for Marcus Leaver and 7.5% of salary potentially payable for Michael Connole. Neither director 
achieved the financial objective which was based on a reduction in net debt. 

After taking account of their financial targets and personal goals, bonus awards were:

Marcus Leaver

Michael Connole

$’000

maximum

% of  

34

–

12%

n/a

2017 annual bonus framework
Following the review of Smith & Williamson LLP, the Remuneration Committee plan to review the remuneration 
structure in 2017 to be implemented in 2018 following approval at the Annual Meeting. 

58

GovernanceMedium-term performance bonus
2014-2016 medium-term bonus framework
This is the third and final year of the current medium term bonus scheme which is designed to motivate management 
to focus on continual profit improvement. The Committee recognises that profit development is not within an annual 
financial cycle. Rather, the publications (which are a substantial part of the Group’s businesses) are substantially 
created in the year before the sales are achieved. Thus within any one financial year, there is a limit to the influence of 
management on profits. These in-year influences are the marketing of the publications and cost control. Emphasis on 
a single year can motivate cost cutting of creative publishing resources to the detriment of the following year’s results. 
Thus the Committee has developed a mix of annual and medium term performance goals. 

To most align these goals with shareholders, the targets are based on improving profits from the prior year(s) as the 
Committee believes that ultimate shareholder value is most driven by a continual improvement in profits from which 
cash is generated for dividend growth.

The profit targets are based on a base year of 2013. The targets have been changed by the Committee to reflect the 
preferred measure of adjusted profit before tax in line with the Annual Bonus Awards. Base is the achieved adjusted 
profits before tax for 2013 adjusted upwards to account for a one-off gain in 2014 on interest charges from the effect  
of terminating an interest rate swap, in 2013. There has been no adjustment for acquisitions. The target is based on 
compound increases over three years over the Base of $12.46m giving Threshold for a 9.3% increase at $13.62m and 
Stretch for a 33.1% increase at $16.6m. 

The Adjusted Profit before Tax for the year ended 31 December 2016 for the purposes of the Medium Term performance 
bonus was $12.42m, on the base figure for 2013 of $12.46m, therefore the target performance was missed and no 
medium-term performance bonus is payable to Marcus Leaver. 

Long-term incentives
PSP Awards
Marcus Leaver was granted an award of 666,666 shares on 22 May 2014 which did not vest until 30 June 2016, subject 
to performance criteria of achieving an average share price of 250p per share over any consecutive 90 day period 
occurring before the vesting period. On 31 March 2016, the Company confirmed that the performance criteria attaching 
to the award had been achieved, and that the shares became capable of being exercised at any time after 30 June 2016. 
On 9 August 2016, 666,666 shares were transferred to Marcus Leaver out of Treasury Stock. The mid-market closing 
price on that date was 263.75p. Marcus Leaver informed the Company on 12 August 2016 that he had sold 313,333 
shares at a price of 250p to settle the tax liability arising on the exercise of the award.

On 18 April 2016, Marcus Leaver was granted 73,750 PSP Awards and Michael Connole was awarded 48,980 PSP 
Awards. The value of these awards was £180,688 and £120,000 respectively based on a closing price of 245p on the 
day before. They represented 50% of salary respectively. On 24 May 2016, following approval at the Annual Meeting 
held on that date, Marcus Leaver was issued with a further 83,732 PSP Awards. These awards which required 
shareholder consent, are treated as though they were issued on 24 September 2015 and represented 50% of salary  
at that time. The value of these awards was £175,000 based on the closing price of 2.09p on 23 September 2015. 

Half of the awards set out above have a performance condition relating to cumulative Adjusted Diluted EPS 
performance for the four financial years 2016 to 2019 inclusive. The other half of these awards have a performance 
condition relating to total shareholder returns (‘TSR’) from a combination of dividends, capital returns and share  
price growth (measured as an average over a 20 business day period leading up to grant and vesting as appropriate). 
The TSR period runs from 18 April 2016 to 18 April 2020.

Targets for EPS are annual compounded growth of 5% for Threshold to 10% for Stretch. Targets for total shareholder 
returns over the period are annual compounded growth of 7% for Threshold and 15% for Stretch.

The Committee believes the TSR directly measures shareholder returns and thereby aligns the goals of management 
and shareholders. However, TSR can be affected by a variety of investment factors, which are far removed from those 
which management can directly affect. The Committee believes that cumulative diluted EPS to be a good measure of 
managements’ long-term impact on the business and which over time translates into shareholder value. Thus a 
combination of TSR and EPS is believed to be suitable goals for the PSP Awards. Major shareholders have been 
consulted about adding the TSR condition.

59

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

Chair and non-executive director fees
With effect from the date of the Annual Meeting in 2014, the non-executive Directors received an annual base fee 
of £35,000, with an additional annual fee for Audit and Remuneration Committee Chairs of £3,500 and the Senior 
Independent Director of £3,000. The Chair receives an annual fee of £70,000.

The non-executive Directors’ fees for 2017 are as follows: Jess Burley £38,500 and Mike Hartley £41,500. Following 
a review of Peter Read’s appointment in accordance with his letter of appointment, it is proposed that he receives 
a fee increase of £2,500, increasing his annual fee to £72,500, to take effect subsequent to the Annual Meeting 
on 16 May 2017.

Relative importance of spend on pay
The graph below shows Quarto’s distributions to shareholders and total employee pay expenditure for the financial 
years ended 31 December 2015 and 31 December 2016.

16

40

34.2

30.8

37.2

34.9

30

20

10

0

Total employee pay

Intellectual property spend

Total dividend

2016

2015

3.1

2.9

Total employee pay has been impacted by exchange rate movements.

Review of group performance
The chart on page 61 compares the value of £100 invested in Quarto shares, including re-invested dividends, on 
31 December 2010 compared to the equivalent investment in the FTSE Small Cap Index, over the last eight financial 
years. The FTSE Small Cap Index has been chosen as it comprises companies of a broadly similar size to Quarto. 
The table below shows the single figure for the CEO over the same period.

CEO single figure of 
remuneration including  
bonus ($’000)

2009

2010

729

750

2011

996

2012

1,0201

2013

870

2014

842

2015

2016

929

3,252

Annual bonus awarded $ amount ($’000s)

% of maximum opportunity

PSP vesting

$ amount ($’000s)

% of maximum opportunity

–

–

–

–

392

572

1212

233

169

305

34

–

–

–

-

–

–

–

–

–

56.9%

33.5% 95.0%

12.0% 

–

–

–

–

–

–

2,651

100%

1  The figure for 2012 is a combination of remuneration of Laurence Orbach, the previous CEO, and Marcus Leaver for the respective periods.
2  Discretionary

2015 annual performance bonus
The Committee considered, in light of the restatement of 2015 accounts, whether any clawback is activated on 2015 
annual performance bonus awards and concluded no clawback is required. 

60

GovernancePerformance graph

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

0

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

■ Quarto ■ FTSE Small Cap 

Change in CEO remuneration and for employees as a whole
The table below shows the change in CEO annual cash remuneration, defined as salary, taxable benefits and annual 
bonus, compared to the average employees for 2015 to 2016.

$’000

Salary

Taxable benefits

Annual variable bonus

Total

2016

488

6

34

528

CEO

2015

536

8

305

849

Average  
for other 
employees

% change

% change

(9%)

(25%)

(88%)

(38%)

(2.4%)

(4%)

33%

(1.6%)

Salary, benefits and bonuses have been impacted by exchange rate movements.

Dilution limits
The Group has at all times complied with the dilution limits set out in the rules of its share plans (principally a limit  
of 10% in 10 years). In the 10 year period to 31 December 2016, awards made under the Group’s share schemes 
represented 6.8% (2015: 4%) of the Group’s issued share capital.

Directors’ shareholding guidelines and share scheme interests
Marcus Leaver’s award of 666,666 shares (granted May 2014) vested in June 2016 and he was not required to retain  
any proportion of these shares.

Otherwise, to date, there has been no requirement for Executive Directors to retain shares as no other shares have 
vested and they are compliant with the shareholding guidelines.

Jess Burley
Chair of the Remuneration Committee  
19 April 2017

61

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016DIRECTORS’ REPORT

Group 
The Directors present their report and the audited financial statements of The Quarto Group, Inc., for the year ended 
December 31, 2016. 

Results and dividends 
The loss for the year is $5.3m (2015 restated: profit of $8.5m). The Directors propose a final ordinary dividend of 
9.87c (7.96p) per share (2015: 9.41c (1.9p) per share), amounting to $2.0m (2015: $1.9m), subject to approval at the  
Annual Meeting. 

Details of significant events since the balance sheet date are included in Note 31 to the financial statements. An 
indication of likely future developments in business of the Group and included in the Strategic Report on page 15.

Directors 
Serving Directors during the year and subsequently, were as follows: 

P. Read

M. E. Leaver 

(Non-executive) Chairman Appointed 24 May 2016

M. D. Connole 

Resignation submitted 30 March 2017

J. Burley

(Non-executive) 

M. G. Hartley

(Non-executive) 

T. J. M. Chadwick (Non-executive) Chairman, Resigned 24 May 2016

M. L. Windeler

(Non-executive) Appointed 24 May 2016, Resigned 27 September 2016

R. J. Morley

C. H. B. Mills

(Non-executive) Deputy Chairman, Resigned 31 March 2016

(Non-executive) Resigned 24 May 2016

None of the Directors have a service agreement of more than one year’s duration. All of the directors are subject  
to annual re-election. The terms and conditions of appointment of non-executive directors are made available for 
inspection at the company’s registered office. 

No Director had a contract of significance with the company or its subsidiaries during the year.

Disclosure of information under Listing Rule 9.8.4
For the purpose of compliance with LR 9.8.4 R, the following information is included by reference within the 
Director’s Report:

LR 9.8.4 R

Location

Directors’ remuneration

Directors’ Remuneration Report, pages 55 to 61

Details of Long-term Incentive Plans

Directors’ Remuneration Report, pages 55 to 61

62

GovernanceEmployees 
Applications for employment of 
disabled persons are always fully 
considered, bearing in mind the 
aptitudes of the applicant concerned. 
In the event of staff becoming 
disabled, every effort is made to 
ensure that their employment with the 
Group continues and that appropriate 
training is arranged. It is the policy of 
the Group that the training, career 
development and promotion of 
disabled persons should, as far as 
possible, be identical with that of 
other employees. 

The Group places considerable value 
on the involvement of its employees 
and has continued its practice of 
keeping them informed on matters 
affecting them as employees and  
on the various factors affecting the 
performance of the Group. This is 
achieved through formal and informal 
meetings. Employees are consulted 
regularly on a wide range of matters.

The Board recognises the importance 
of diversity amongst its employees 
and is committed to ensuring that 
employees are selected and promoted 
on the basis of merit and ability, 
regardless of age, gender, race, 
religion, sexual orientation or 
disability. The gender split across  
the Group for the year ended 
31 December 2016 is illustrated  
in the table below.

Board 

Senior Leadership 
Team 

Males Females

4

5 

1

3

All employees 

136 

314

The Group’s Senior Leadership Team 
comprises the Group’s CEO and CFO, 
together with seven senior managers.

The gender split of the Senior 
Leadership Team changed post 
year-end to five males and four 
females.

Substantial shareholders
The Directors have been advised of the following shareholders who have an 
interest of 3% or more in the shares of the common stock of the Company at 
31 December 2016 and 31 March 2017. 31 March 2017 is the latest practicable 
date prior to the publication of this report.

As at 
31 December 2016

As at 
31 March 2017

Number 
of 
US$0.10 
shares of 
common 
stock

% holding 
of the 
issued 
capital 
of the 
Company

Number 
of 
US$0.10 
shares of 
common 
stock

% holding 
of the 
issued 
capital 
of the 
Company

Mr L F Orbach

2,934,185

14.35 2,934,185

Liontrust Asset Management

2,630,282

12.87 2,556,282

Herald Investment Management

Henderson Global Investors

Unicorn Asset Management

Gresham House Asset Management 
Limited

1,812,045

1,160,233

1,081,582

8.86

1,812,045

5.68

1,160,233

5.29 1,150,000

898,837

4.40

898,837

River & Mercantile Asset Management

896,555

4.39

401,555

AXA Investment Managers UK

875,000

4.28

875,000

Lazard Freres Gestion

830,000

4.06

993,674

Cavendish Asset Management

JP Morgan Asset Management

791,000

769,969

3.87

685,000

3.77

769,969

14.35

12.50

8.86

5.68

5.63

4.40

1.96

4.28

4.86

3.35

3.77

Risk management strategy
The Group is exposed to a number  
of principal risks and uncertainties.  
The Group’s financial risk management 
strategy is set out in Note 22. 
Operational risks are set out on 
page 22 of the Financial Review.

Corporate governance
The Company is committed to high 
standards of corporate governance  
and supports the principles laid down 
in the UK Corporate Governance Code 
issued by the Financial Reporting 
Council in 2016 (the ‘Code’). The 
Board considers that the Company 
has been in compliance with the 
principles and provisions of the Code, 
with the exception of those outlined 
below, throughout the year ended  
31 December, 2016 and to the date  
of this report.

The rights attaching to the Company’s 
shares of common stock are set out  
in the Company’s By-Laws, which can 
be found on the Company’s website, 
www.quarto.com. The rules for 
appointment and replacement of the 
Directors are set out in the Company’s 
By-Laws. The powers of the Directors 
are set out in the Company’s By-Laws.

The Company may purchase its own 
shares through the market or by 
tender at a price which will not exceed 
the average prices at which business 
was done for 10 business days before 
the purchase is made or, in the case of 
a purchase through the market, at the 
market price, provided that it is not 
more than 5% above such average.  
The Company may amend its By-Laws 
by special resolution approved by the 
affirmative vote of the holders of  
a majority of the voting power of  
the shares. The Directors’ interests in 
the shares of the Company are set out 
on page 57. There are no restrictions 
on the number of shares that Directors 
can hold.

63

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016DIRECTORS’ REPORT CONTINUED

The principles of the Code have been 
applied as follows:

a) The Board of Directors represents 

the shareholders’ interests in 
maintaining and growing a 
successful business including 
optimising consistent long-term 
financial returns.

b) As at 31 December 2016, the Board 
comprised two Executive Directors 
and three Non-executive Directors. 
The Chairman is responsible for  
the leadership of the Board and 
ensuring its effectiveness. The 
different roles of the Chairman  
and Chief Executive Officer are 
acknowledged. The senior 
independent Non-executive 
Director is Michael Hartley who is 
available to shareholders, if they 
have concerns which are not able  
to be resolved through normal 
channels. Three Non-executive 
Directors, Peter Read, Michael 
Hartley and Jess Burley are 
considered by the Board to be 
independent. During the year. 
Timothy Chadwick (resigned  
24 May 2016) and Christopher Mills 
(resigned 24 May 2016) were not 
deemed to be independent 
because of their relationship with 
Harwood Capital LLP, which was  
a major shareholder. Bob Morley, 
(resigned 31 March 2016), who co- 
founded the Group and previously 
served as a Director until May 2012, 
was also not deemed independent.

  There are a number of standing 

Committees of the Board to which 
various matters are delegated. They 
all have formal terms of reference 
approved by the Board which are 
available on the Company’s website 
(www.quarto.com).

Attendance by Directors at Board and Committee meetings in 2016

Board 

Audit 
Committee

Nominations 
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Jess Burley

Timothy Chadwick1

Michael Hartley

Marcus Leaver6

Michael Connole6

Christopher Mills2

Robert Morley3

Peter Read4

Marie-Louise Windeler5 

Total number of meetings

5

2

7

7

8

–

1

5

3

8

3

–

4

4

4

–

–

4

2

4

3

1

3

3

–

1

–

2

–

3

4

2

4

2

2

1

–

2

–

4

1  Timothy Chadwick resigned on 24 May 2016
2  Christopher Mills resigned on 24 May 2016
3  Robert Morley resigned on 31 March 2016
4  Peter Read appointed on 24 May 2016
5  Marie-Louise Windeler appointed on 24 May 2016 and resigned on 27 September 2016
6  These Directors are not members of the Audit or Remuneration Committees and attend  

by invitation only.

c) The Board met eight times in  
2016. Attendance details are  
set out above. A formal agenda  
is prepared for each meeting and  
all board papers and information 
are circulated to the Board at  
least a week before the meetings.

d) All of the Directors are subject to 
re-election by the shareholders at 
the Annual Meeting. The Board is 
satisfied to support the re-election 
of Peter Read, Mike Hartley and 
Jess Burley as non-executive 
Directors as they have individually 
produced excellent performance in 
their duties and have shown a high  
level of commitment to their roles.

e) The remuneration of the Executive 
Directors is recommended by  
the Remuneration Committee, 
comprising Jess Burley, who is the 
Committee Chairman, Michael 
Hartley and Peter Read. A separate 
report with respect to Directors’ 
remuneration is included on pages 
55 to 61. The Committee meets  
at least three times a year. At year 
end 31 December 2016 the 
Committee had met four times.

f)  The Audit Committee is comprised 

of Michael Hartley, who is Committee 
Chairman, and Jess Burley. The 
Board is satisfied that Michael 
Hartley, together with Jess Burley, 
has appropriate financial experience 
to fulfil their role. Further details of 
the Committee’s work can be found 
on pages 43 to 45.

64

Governanceg) The Nominations Committee is 

comprised of Peter Read, who is 
Committee Chairman, Michael 
Hartley, Jess Burley and Marcus 
Leaver. Details of the work of the 
Nominations Committee during the 
year are set out in its report on  
page 42.

j)  The Board has a procedure for 
Directors to take independent 
professional advice at the 
Company’s expense, if required.

k) All Directors have access to  

the advice and services of the 
Company Secretary.

l)  Quarto has arranged appropriate 
insurance cover in respect of legal 
action against the Directors.

m) The Company has an established 

whistle-blowing policy.

The provisions of the Code not 
complied with are as follows:

A.3.1. – As noted above, Timothy 
Chadwick, the Chairman of the Board 
until 24 May 2016, was not independent.

The Board will continue to review its 
corporate governance arrangements, 
in the light of the Code, as the Group 
develops and grows, and in particular 
will review those provisions that are 
not currently complied with.

The Directors consider that the annual 
report and accounts, taken as a whole, 
are fair, balanced and understandable 
and provide the information necessary 
for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
performance, business model  
and strategy.

h) A formal review of the performance 
of the Board, its Committees and 
the Directors was carried out 
before the year end, led by the 
Chairman and assisted by the 
Company Secretary. A questionnaire 
was used as part of the process and 
individual performance was 
reviewed by the Chairman. The 
Chairman’s own performance  
was subject to a review led by the 
Senior Independent Director. The 
output from the appraisal confirmed 
that the Board and its Committees 
were operating effectively.

i)  The Chief Executive Officer  

and Chief Financial Officer are 
responsible for investor relations. 
They meet with major shareholders 
during the course of the year to 
ensure that they develop an 
understanding of their views,which 
are communicated to the rest of the 
Board at Board meetings. The 
Non-executive Chairman and 
Senior Independent Director meet 
with major shareholders from time 
to time. Shareholders are invited to 
attend the Annual Meeting at least 
twenty-one days in advance of the 
meeting. All Directors attend the 
meeting which is used to 
communicate with shareholders.

Greenhouse gas emissions 
reporting
During the year, the Group worked 
with Energy Management LLP, an 
energy procurement and carbon 
consultancy, to develop GHG reporting 
protocol based on DEFRA and World 
Resource Institute guidelines.

The Group has chosen to use 
Operational Control in their approach 
to reporting utility data, electricity and 
natural gas from UK and International 
operations. This includes sites that 
have been disposed of during the 
reporting period. Scope 1 (Natural 
Gas) and Scope 2 (Electricity) are 
reported on below, but the Group are 
not reporting on Scope 3 emissions 
covering emissions from transport and 
emissions from fully serviced offices 
where only a service charge is applied.

The Group has identified GHG 
(Greenhouse Gas) emissions per 
employee as the most appropriate 
available KPI (referred to as the 
intensity ratio) and has chosen 2014  
as our Base Year, following the 
disposal of our silk screen printing 
business in 2013.

Global GHG emissions

2016

2015

Tonnes of CO2e 

13 

258 

271 

17

268

285

 499

321*

0.54 

0.89

Scope 1 

Scope 2 

Total GHG 
emissions (CO2e) 

Average number  
of staff

Emissions per staff 
member 

*  Excluding staff at fully serviced offices.

65

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016significant failings in respect of 
financial reporting controls during 
the year, which together with remedial 
action is discussed in the Audit 
Committee Report on pages 43 to 45. 
We will continue to develop our risk 
management framework during 2017.

Anne Crompton 
Secretary
19 April 2017
Company Registration Number:  
FC0 13814

DIRECTORS’ REPORT CONTINUED

Risk management and  
internal controls
The Board is responsible for the 
Group’s system of internal control  
and for reviewing its effectiveness. 
As stated previously, the Directors 
have carried out a robust assessment 
of the principal businesses and 
considered the controls in place to 
eliminate or mitigate the impact of  
key risks. The Board has in place risk 
management systems in relation to 
the Company’s financial reporting 
process and the Group’s process for 
the preparation of the consolidated 
financial statements. However, such 
systems are designed to manage 
rather than eliminate the risk of failure 
to achieve business objectives and  
can provide only reasonable and not 
absolute assurance against material 
misstatement or loss.

Established procedures are in place  
to identify and consolidate reporting 
entities. Our control activities include 
policies and practices covering 
appropriate authorisation and approval 
of transactions, the application of 
financial reporting standards and 
reviews of significant judgements 
and financial performance.

The main elements of the internal 
control and financial reporting 
systems are:

a) The results of individual operating 

segments are reported and 
reviewed by the Board at its 
meetings during the year.

b) The management reports of each 
operating segment are tailored to 
suit the business and management 
needs of local management. Each 
operating segment has its own key 
performance indicators and these 
are regularly reviewed and assessed.

c) In addition to monthly reporting, 
individual operating units report 
certain management information 
more frequently, where it is 
considered appropriate.

d) All operating units report their  

bank balances weekly and a report 
is produced summarising the  
Group position.

e) The Chief Executive Officer and  
the Chief Financial Officer make 
frequent visits to all operating 
segments. These visits include 
reviews of the internal control  
and financial reporting systems. 
In 2017, dedicated internal audit 
resource will assume responsibility 
for internal audit reviews, reporting 
directly to the Audit Committee.

f)  All operating units prepare annual 
budgets and cash flow forecasts 
which are reviewed by the Board.

The UK Corporate Governance 
Code introduced a requirement that 
the Directors perform on-going 
monitoring and review of the 
effectiveness of the Group’s system of 
internal controls, to cover all controls 
including financial, operational, 
compliance, and risk management. 
The Board confirms that there are 
ongoing processes covering the 
identification, evaluation and 
management of the significant risks 
faced by the Group and covers all 
material controls. The processes are 
carried out through Group Board 
meetings, quarterly subsidiary 
management meetings, discussion 
and review by the Executive Board 
and the finance department during 
the several visits per year to individual 
operating units, and discussions 
with professional advisers where 
appropriate. The Board identified 

66

GovernanceSTATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES 
IN RESPECT OF THE DIRECTORS’ REPORT AND 
THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The Directors are responsible for 
preparing the Directors’ Report,  
the Directors’ Remuneration Report 
and the financial statements in 
accordance with applicable law 
and regulations. The Company is 
incorporated in the State of Delaware, 
United States and is subject to 
the law of that state which places 
no requirement for annual reporting  
to shareholders upon the Directors. 
However, since the Company has a 
listing on the London Stock Exchange 
and a place of business in the UK, 
the Directors are required to prepare 
financial statements which comply 
with certain provisions which are 
contained within the Listing Rules of 
the UK Financial Conduct Authority 
(the Listing Rules) and UK company 
law for overseas companies.

The Company is an ‘overseas’ 
company within the meaning of 
the Companies Act 2006.

The Directors have elected to prepare 
the Group financial statements in 
accordance with IFRSs as adopted 
by the EU, and the parent Company 
financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and UK GAAP, 
including FRS102 ‘The Financial 
Reporting Standard applicable in 
the UK and Republic of Ireland’.

The Directors have accepted 
responsibility for preparing Group 
financial statements as required by 
IFRSs as adopted by the EU which 
present fairly the financial position 
and the performance of the group. 
The Companies Act 2006 provides in 
relation to such financial statements 
that references in the relevant part of 
that Act to financial statements giving 
a true and fair view are references to 
their achieving a fair presentation.

The Directors have accepted 
responsibility for preparing parent 
Company financial statements which 
give a true and fair view of the state  
of affairs and profit or loss of the  
parent company.

In preparing the parent Company 
financial statements, the Directors  
are required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies 
and then apply them consistently;
•  make judgements and accounting 
estimates that are reasonable  
and prudent;

•  state whether Financial Reporting 

Standard 102 ‘The Financial 
Reporting Standard applicable 
in the UK and Republic of Ireland’ 
has been followed, subject to any 
material departures disclosed and 
explained in the financial 
statements; and

•  prepare the financial statements on 
the going concern basis unless it is 
inappropriate to presume that the 
company will continue in business.

In preparing the Group financial 
statements, International Accounting 
Standard 1 requires that Directors:

•  properly select and apply 

accounting policies;

•  present information, including 

accounting policies, in a manner 
that provides relevant, reliable, 
comparable and understandable 
information;

•  provide additional disclosures 
when compliance with the 
specific requirements in IFRSs 
are insufficient to enable users to 
understand the impact of particular 
transactions, other events and 
conditions on the entity’s 
financial position and financial 
performance; and

•  make an assessment of the 

company’s ability to continue 
as a going concern.

The Directors are responsible for 
keeping adequate accounting 
records that are sufficient to show and 
explain the Company’s transactions 
and disclose with reasonable accuracy 
at any time the financial position of 
the Company and enable them to 
ensure that the financial statements 
and the Remuneration report comply 
with the Companies Act 2006 and 
Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. They 
are also responsible for safeguarding 
the assets of the Company and hence 
for taking reasonable steps for the 
prevention and detection of fraud  
and other irregularities.

67

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES IN RESPECT OF THE 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT AND THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

The Directors confirm that:

•  so far as each director is aware, 

there is no relevant audit 
information of which the 
Company’s auditor is unaware; and

•  the Directors have taken all the 

steps that they ought to have taken 
as Directors in order to make 
themselves aware of any relevant 
audit information and to establish 
that the auditor is aware of that 
information.

The Directors are responsible for 
preparing the annual report in 
accordance with applicable law and 
regulations. Having taken advice from 
the Audit Committee, the Directors 
consider the annual report and the 
financial statements, taken as a whole, 
provides the information necessary to 
assess the Company’s performance, 
business model and strategy and is 
fair, balanced and understandable.

The Directors are responsible for 
the maintenance and integrity of the 
corporate and financial information 
included on the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the United Kingdom 
governing the preparation and 
dissemination of financial statements 
may differ from legislation in other 
jurisdictions.

We confirm to the best of  
our knowledge:

•  the Group financial statements, 

prepared in accordance with IFRSs 
as adopted by the European Union, 
give a true and fair view of the 
assets, liabilities, financial position 
and profit or loss of the Group and 
the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole;
•  the Strategic Report includes a fair 
review of the development and 
performance of the business and 
the position of the Company and 
the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole, 
together with a description of the 
principal risks and uncertainties 
that they face; and

•  the annual report and financial 

statements, taken as a whole, are fair, 
balanced and understandable, and 
provide the information necessary 
for shareholders to assess the 
Company’s position, performance, 
business model and strategy.

Anne Crompton 
Secretary 
19 April 2017

68

GovernanceINDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS  
OF THE QUARTO GROUP, INC.

Opinion on financial statements of The Quarto Group, Inc.
In our opinion:

•  the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs 

as at 31 December 2016 and of the group’s loss for the year then ended;

•  the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial 

Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union;

•  the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally 

Accepted Accounting Practice, including FRS 102 ‘The Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and 
Republic of Ireland’; and

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 

which would have applied were the company incorporated in the United Kingdom.

The financial statements that we have audited comprise:
•  the consolidated income statement;
•  the consolidated statement of comprehensive income;
•  the consolidated balance sheet;
•  the consolidated statement of changes in equity;
•  the consolidated cash flow statement;
•  the related notes to the consolidated financial statements 1 to 32;
•  the parent company balance sheet;
•  the parent company statement of changes in equity; and
•  the related notes to the parent company financial statements 1 to 9.

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the group financial statements is 
applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the European Union. The financial reporting framework that has been applied 
in the preparation of the parent company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting 
Standards (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice), including FRS 102 ‘The Financial Reporting 
Standard applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland’.

Summary of our audit approach

Key risks

The key risks that we identified in the current year were:

Materiality

Scoping

Significant changes 
in our approach

•  Accounting for the potential Books & Gifts Direct (‘BGD’) disposal transactions;
•  BGD Australia Stock in transit accounting and prior year adjustment;
•  Going concern and covenant compliance;
•  Acquisition accounting for becker&mayer;
•  Assessment of the carrying value of goodwill of Quarto US ‘QUS’;
•  Assessment of the carrying value of pre-publication costs; and
•  Assessing the level of sales returns against revenue recognised.

Within this report, any new risks are identified with 
prior year identified with  .

 and any risks which are the same as the 

The materiality that we used in the current year was $745,000 (2015: $697,000) which was 
determined on the basis of 5.7% of adjusted profit before tax (although our adjusted profit 
before tax does not add back amortisation of intangibles).

We complete full scope audits of Quarto US and Quarto UK components. We also include 
Australia, New Zealand and Hong Kong as full scope audits.

These locations represent the principal business units and account for 98% of the Group’s 
revenue (2015: 99%), 94% of the Group’s adjusted profit before tax (2015: 97%) and 99% of the 
Group’s net assets (2015: 98%).

•  Following management announcing their intention to divest the BGD business and given the 

estimated proceeds were significantly below the carrying value of the goodwill and net 
assets, we therefore identified this as a key audit risk.

•  As a result of Group management’s identification of material errors in the stock in transit ‘SIT’ 

balance in Australia we identified this as a new key risk.

•  As a result of management identifying that the Q4 2016 Cashflow after debt service (‘CFADS’) 
covenant test had failed, we identified going concern and covenant compliance as a key risk.
•  We included the acquisition of becker&mayer as a key risk given that this was a significant 

acquisition in the year.

69

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED

Going concern and the directors’ assessment of the principal risks that would threaten  
the solvency or liquidity of the group

We confirm that we have nothing material to add or 
draw attention to in respect of these matters.

We agreed with the directors’ adoption of the going 
concern basis of accounting and we did not identify any 
such material uncertainties. However, because not all 
future events or conditions can be predicted, this 
statement is not a guarantee as to the group’s ability 
to continue as a going concern.

As required by the Listing Rules we have reviewed the 
directors’ statement regarding the appropriateness of the 
going concern basis of accounting contained within Note 1 
to the financial statements and the directors’ statement on 
the longer-term viability of the group contained within the 
financial review on page 29.

We are required to state whether we have anything material 
to add or draw attention to in relation to:

•  the directors' confirmation on page 22 that they have 
carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks 
facing the group, including those that would threaten 
its business model, future performance, solvency or 
liquidity;

•  the disclosures on pages 22 and 23 that describe  

those risks and explain how they are being managed 
or mitigated;

•  the directors’ statement in Note 1 to the financial 

statements about whether they considered it appropriate 
to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in 
preparing them and their identification of any material 
uncertainties to the group’s ability to continue to do so 
over a period of at least twelve months from the date of 
approval of the financial statements; and

•  the directors’ explanation on page 29 as to how they 
have assessed the prospects of the group, over what 
period they have done so and why they consider that 
period to be appropriate, and their statement as to 
whether they have a reasonable expectation that the 
group will be able to continue in operation and meet its 
liabilities as they fall due over the period of their 
assessment, including any related disclosures drawing 
attention to any necessary qualifications or assumptions.

Independence

We are required to comply with the Financial Reporting 
Council’s Ethical Standards for Auditors and confirm that 
we are independent of the group and we have fulfilled 
our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with 
those standards.

We confirm that we are independent of the group and 
we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in 
accordance with those standards. We also confirm we 
have not provided any of the prohibited non-audit 
services referred to in those standards.

70

Governance 
Our assessment of risks of material misstatement
The assessed risks of material misstatement described below are those that had the greatest effect on our audit 
strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit and directing the efforts of the engagement team.

 Accounting for the potential BGD disposal transactions

Risk description

How the scope of our audit 
responded to the risk

The Group has been seeking to dispose of its BGD Australia and New Zealand businesses. 
Heads of terms were signed in January 2017 and further negotiations followed. A disposal 
in Australia was agreed on 25 March 2017 and completed on 31 March 2017 for 
consideration of A$1 together with the assignment of A$1.9m of certain debts owed by 
the master franchisees acquiring the business to BGD Australia. New Zealand disposal 
discussions remain ongoing. These transactions gave rise to management judgements in 
particular in relation to the impact on the valuation of the business given the actual and 
potential proceeds were significantly below the carrying value of the goodwill and net 
assets, resulting in an exceptional impairment of $14.2m.

Management have also set out supplementary information on the face of the income 
statement to show the results of the BGD segment separately, as the transactions did not 
meet the assets held for sale criteria at the balance sheet date, and management thought 
this additional disclosure would be beneficial to the readers. This was discussed by the 
Audit Committee (see page 44). Note 5 to the accounts sets out the material impairments 
recognised as exceptional items and subsequent events Note 31 sets out the status of 
the transactions.

•  We obtained and reviewed the signed sale and purchase agreement for the Australia 

disposal.

•  We obtained the broker information in relation to the New Zealand discussions.
•  We reviewed a report from management’s external advisors relating to potential Australia 
and New Zealand disposal options and valuation impacts and considered the evidence 
contained in the report.

•  We reviewed the Group’s board minutes to confirm the board’s conclusions on potential 

transactions in 2017.

•  We considered the component auditor reporting in particular on receivables confirmations 

received.

Key observations

•  We concluded, consistent with management, that the BGD transaction completed post year 

end and did not represent an asset held for sale at the balance sheet date.

•  Our audit identified adjustments to the local reported results which were corrected by 

Group management. At a Group level these adjustments were offset against the Group’s 
impairment charge arising from the estimated transaction proceeds with no overall impact 
on the segment results. 

•  Management’s estimated proceeds based on the concluded transaction, existing 

discussions and other available information appeared reasonable.

 BGD Australia Stock in transit accounting and prior year adjustment

Risk description

Group management’s identification of material errors in the stock in transit ‘SIT’ inventory 
balance, increasing cost of sales by $0.7m on the 2015 results and reducing 2014 and earlier 
period retained earnings by $1.0m in Australia, required assessment of the nature and timing 
of the errors to determine the appropriate corrections and whether there was a prior period 
impact which may result in a prior year restatement.

A high level assessment was performed by a third party adviser of the business. UK 
management then undertook a detailed assessment with local management to establish the 
corrections required noting that the prior period errors related to cut off procedures in relation 
to stock in transit and errors in relation to the accounting for certain inventory returns. 

The resulting prior year restatement has been detailed in Note 1 of the accounts. The audit 
committee report on page 44 discusses the control failures identified which resulted in 
the errors.

71

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED

How the scope of our audit 
responded to the risk

•  We reviewed the reports from the third party adviser to understand their consideration of 
the underlying cause of the errors and their preliminary quantification and assessment of 
the errors.

•  We reviewed management’s paper and held regular meetings with management to 

understand the nature of the errors identified and evaluate the adequacy of the work 
performed during the audit process.

•  We assessed the prior period errors in light of IAS 8 ‘Accounting policies, changes in 

accounting estimates and errors’.

Key observations

•  We reported control deficiencies relating to the financial reporting processes and 

reconciliations relating to the Australian and New Zealand businesses. These are discussed 
in the Audit Committee report on pages 44 and 45.

•  We concur that it is appropriate to account for the prior year errors as a prior year 
restatement, and we consider that the disclosures recorded by management are 
appropriate.

 Going concern and covenant compliance

Risk description

How the scope of our audit 
responded to the risk

Key observations

Management identified post year end that the Q4 2016 CFADS covenant test had failed 
although this did not constitute a breach as the current agreement allows for a covenant test 
to fail once. Additional sensitivities were identified for the Q1 CFADS 2017 covenant headroom 
and subsequent periods due to the seasonality of the business. The exclusion of the 
exceptional impairments from the future covenant tests was also a key factor for forecast 
compliance. In light of this we elevated going concern to a significant risk.

Page 84 and Note 1 to the accounts sets out management’s disclosure and page 43 of the 
Audit Committee report highlights the control failures identified in this area.

•  We analysed the going concern model and additional sensitivities applied by management 

in light of the Q4 CFADS fail, together with the impact of available and committed 
mitigating actions. 

•  We reviewed the bank’s confirmation for the permitted exclusion of the exceptional 

impairment charges from the covenant calculations.

We consider that meeting the Q1 covenant test, the forecast covenant compliance and the 
mitigating actions available to management reasonably support the Board’s assessment that 
there is not a material uncertainty in relation to going concern. As noted in the Audit 
Committee report on page 43 we also highlighted control deficiencies in relation to this risk.

 Acquisition accounting for becker&mayer

Risk description

How the scope of our audit 
responded to the risk

The Group acquired b&m on 31 July 2016 for consideration of $11.3m. Management judgement 
is involved in acquisition accounting in relation to: the identification and valuation of acquired 
intangibles (being pre-publication costs and backlists) and estimation of useful economic lives; 
the fair value of consideration; the fair value of the assets and liabilities acquired; and the 
alignment of accounting policies. The purchase price allocation and fair value of assets 
acquired is set out in Note 30. This is also discussed in the Audit Committee report on page 44.

•  We have assessed the nature of the transaction with reference to IFRS3 ‘Business 

Combinations’.

•  We reviewed the purchase agreements.
•  We engaged our valuation specialists to assess the appropriateness of the valuation model 
and certain key assumptions within of intangibles valuation prepared by management’s 
external expert. 

•  We assessed the forecasts and discount rates used in estimating contingent consideration 

for consistency with the impairment review and going concern analysis.

•  We audited the acquired assets and liabilities to supporting documentation, agreements, as 
well as post acquisition receipts and payments, and inventory count procedures rolled back 
to acquisition date.

72

GovernanceKey observations

We concur with management’s view that the b&m acquisition is a business combination within 
the scope of IFRS3 ‘Business Combinations’.

We identified reclassification adjustments between other assets and liabilities, and goodwill 
which were corrected by management as referenced in the Audit Committee report on 
page 44 and identified a deficiency in the controls around acquisition accounting, as 
referenced in the Audit Committee report on page 44.

 Assessment of the carrying value of QUS goodwill

Risk description

How the scope of our audit 
responded to the risk

The Group holds $36.1m of goodwill on its balance sheet following the recognition of $3.1m 
of goodwill on acquisitions, $6.0m of impairment relating to BGD (see earlier section) and 
exchange movements. The largest balance relates to QUS ($30.0m) as shown in Note 11 to  
the accounts and the Group’s impairment policies for this balance are disclosed in Note 1  
to the accounts. 

We identify the carrying value of QUS goodwill as a key risk due to the continuing sensitivity 
of this CGU to reasonable possible changes in key assumptions around discount rates, cash 
flow forecasts and growth rates and the inclusion of these disclosures in the 2016 annual 
report. This is also discussed in the Audit Committee report on page 44.

•  We challenged management on the appropriateness of including the acquisition goodwill 
as part of the QUS CGU through evidencing the level of integration of businesses and the 
internal reporting of the Group and reviewed the acquisition board papers and the due 
diligence reports where available.

•  We critically challenged the key judgements made by management around cash flow 

forecasts, growth rates and discount rates through:
 – testing the integrity of management’s model;
 – engaging our valuation specialists to independently establish an appropriate 

discount rate;

 – performing historical forecasting accuracy analysis and assessing key changes 

in forecasts;

 – performing benchmarking of competitors and industry data;
 – considering post year end trading performance; and
 – performing sensitivity analysis to assess breakeven points and scenario combinations. 

Key observations

•  We identified certain process deficiencies in this area, which are discussed in the Audit 

Committee report on page 44.

•  QUS goodwill remains sensitive to changes in key assumptions. It is appropriate to disclose 

reasonably possible change scenarios.

 Assessment of the carrying value of pre-publication costs

Risk description

The Group’s net book value of capitalised pre-publication costs at 31 December 2016 was 
$61.1m (2015: $59.4m) as detailed in Note 15. The Group capitalises third party costs incurred 
and directly attributable costs in developing book titles prior to their publication. The Group 
amortises its pre-publication costs over a period of up to three years on a straight line basis 
which is considered to reflect the life of its imprints on a portfolio basis.

The nature of the asset involves judgement in respect of the life of an imprint and ultimately 
its recoverability.

Management also undertook an exercise to review the useful economic lives of its imprints and 
increased the lives of certain imprints to 3 years following this exercise. The $2.1m reduction in 
2016 amortisation charge (if applying legacy UELs) has been disclosed as a change in 
accounting estimate with the effect being applied prospectively, in accordance with IAS8 
‘Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors’.

This is also discussed in the Audit Committee report on page 44.

73

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED

How the scope of our audit 
responded to the risk

•  We analysed the Group’s historical revenue profile by looking at the profile of revenue 

earned from 2013 and 2014 additions in the UK and US.

•  We performed testing of third party costs and directly attributable internal costs capitalised 
in accordance with the requirements of IAS 38 ‘Intangible Assets’ by sample testing them to 
supporting invoices as well as assessing the validity and allocation of payroll costs to titles 
through review of timesheets.

•  We performed benchmarking of the amortisation policy and profile against a number of 

industry peers.

•  We assessed the recoverability based on a CGU basis as well as a on a sample basis of 

current year contribution per title.

Key observations

•  The results of our procedures were satisfactory and we agree that management’s change in 

accounting estimate and disclosure appears reasonable and consistent with the 
requirements of IAS 8, ‘Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors’.

 Assessment of sales returns against revenue recognition

Risk description

How the scope of our audit 
responded to the risk

The Group primarily generates revenue from publishing new titles and sales of back catalogue 
(see revenue recognition policy in Note 1). In certain business units customers have a right of 
return for a limited period and revenue is recorded net of a provision for these returns based 
on historical data. Management judgement is required when assessing the level of sales 
returns subsequent to the year-end to be provided for at the year-end. Key assumptions 
principally surround historical return experience when estimating future sale return levels 
against revenue recognised in the year. This is also discussed in the Audit Committee report 
on page 45.

The audit procedures we performed in respect of this risk included:

•  Testing a sample of underlying returns data used to develop the sales return estimate for 
completeness and accuracy and challenging the appropriateness of the rate by reference 
to current and post year end sales returns levels. 
Independently recalculated the returns provision and reviewed the level of sales post year 
end for relative consistency with year-end assumptions with no significant issues arising.

• 

•  Using analytical techniques to assess monthly returns by reference to historical trends. 
•  Considering forecasting accuracy by comparing actual returns against accrual estimates.

Key observations

We concur with management’s view that the adjustment for sales returns against revenue 
appears reasonable.

These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our 
opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

74

GovernanceOur application of materiality
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that makes it probable that the 
economic decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable person would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in 
planning the scope of our audit work and in evaluating the results of our work.

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Group materiality

$745,000 (2015: $697,000)

Basis for determining 
materiality

Our materiality is 5.7% of adjusted profit before tax (2015: 5.0% of adjusted profit before tax).

Adjusted profit before tax is derived from the loss before tax with exceptional items added 
back. The exceptional items per Note 5 have been added back to the reported loss before tax.

Rationale for the benchmark 
applied

Management’s adjusted profit before tax measure also adds back the amortisation of acquired 
intangibles. 

We have determined a profit based measure is appropriate in line with prior year. The adjusted 
profit before tax measure excludes those items identified as exceptional in the annual report 
(Note 5) and is consistent with the measures used by the Group for internal and external 
reporting requirements. This measure has been used to facilitate a better understanding  
of the trading performance of the Group, it is consistent with our approach adopted in 
previous years.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit differences in excess of $37,250 
(2015: $13,900), as well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative 
grounds. We also report to the Audit Committee on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing the overall 
presentation of the financial statements.

An overview of the scope of our audit
Our Group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of the Group, its environment and assessing the risks of 
material misstatement at the Group level. 

Based on that assessment we include Quarto Publishing Plc, Quarto Publishing USA Inc., (including the businesses 
acquired during the year), and The Quarto Group Inc. as full scope audit (Scope A) procedures to statutory or 
component materiality completed by Deloitte London.

We include Australia, New Zealand and Hong Kong as full scope audits (scope B) where the audit work is performed by 
overseas component auditors under our direction and supervision to component materiality or local statutory materiality. 

These locations which were subject to full scope audit procedures and represent the principal business units and 
account for 98% of the Group’s revenue (2015: 99%), 94% of the Group’s adjusted profit before tax (2015: 97%) and 99% 
of the Group’s net assets (2015: 98%).

We completed analytical procedures for operations in Switzerland and for other holding companies on an entity only 
basis to confirm there are no significant risks of material misstatements within these entities.

At the parent entity level we also test the Group consolidation process.

In the current year given the errors identified in the BGD Australia business we performed an increased level of 
supervision of our component audit team as they performed their audit procedures. We held regular conference calls to 
discuss the issues identified and the progress of the procedures. We performed a detailed file review of their 2016 audit 
working papers.

75

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED

Opinion on other matters prescribed by our engagement letter
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

•  the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the 

Companies Act 2006 were the requirements of the Act to apply to The Quarto Group Inc.; 

•  the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the financial 

statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and

•  the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the company and its environment obtained in the course of the 
audit, we have not identified any material misstatements in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report.

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

We have nothing to report arising from these matters.

We have nothing to report arising from our review.

We confirm that we have not identified any such 
inconsistencies or misleading statements.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception

Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records
Under our engagement letter we are required to report to you 
if, in our opinion:

•  we have not received all the information and explanations 

we require for our audit; or

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the 

parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not 
been received from branches not visited by us; or
•  the parent company financial statements are not in 
agreement with the accounting records and returns.

Directors’ remuneration
Under our engagement letter we are also required to report if 
in our opinion certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration 
have not been made or the part of the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report to be audited is not in agreement with 
the accounting records and returns.

Corporate Governance Statement
Under the Listing Rules we are also required to review part 
of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the 
company’s compliance with certain provisions of the UK 
Corporate Governance Code.

Our duty to read other information in the Annual Report
Under International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland), 
we are required to report to you if, in our opinion, information 
in the annual report is:

•  materially inconsistent with the information in the audited 

financial statements; or

•  apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially 

inconsistent with, our knowledge of the group acquired in 
the course of performing our audit; or

•  otherwise misleading.

In particular, we are required to consider whether we have 
identified any inconsistencies between our knowledge 
acquired during the audit and the directors’ statement that 
they consider the annual report is fair, balanced and 
understandable and whether the annual report appropriately 
discloses those matters that we communicated to the audit 
committee which we consider should have been disclosed.

76

GovernanceRespective responsibilities of directors and auditor
As explained more fully in the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement, the directors are responsible for the preparation 
of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and 
express an opinion on the financial statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on 
Auditing (UK and Ireland). We also comply with International Standard on Quality Control 1 (UK and Ireland). Our audit 
methodology and tools aim to ensure that our quality control procedures are effective, understood and applied. Our 
quality controls and systems include our dedicated professional standards review team and independent partner reviews.

This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those 
matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted 
by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the company and the company’s members as 
a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Scope of the audit of the financial statements
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to 
give reasonable assurance that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by 
fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the Group’s and the 
parent company’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and adequately disclosed; the reasonableness of 
significant accounting estimates made by the directors; and the overall presentation of the financial statements. In 
addition, we read all the financial and non-financial information in the annual report to identify material inconsistencies 
with the audited financial statements and to identify any information that is apparently materially incorrect based 
on, or materially inconsistent with, the knowledge acquired by us in the course of performing the audit. If we become 
aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the implications for our report.

Deloitte LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditor
London
19 April 2017

77

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2016

Year ended 31 December 2016

Year ended 31 December 2015

Group 
excluding 
Books & 
Gifts 
Direct 
$’000

Notes

Books & 
Gifts 
Direct 
$’000

Group 
$’000

Group 
excluding 
Books & 
Gifts 
Direct 
$’000

Restated 
(Note 1) 
Books & 
Gifts 
Direct
$’000

Restated 
(Note 1) 
Group
$’000

2

169,076

19,358

188,434

160,105

22,060

182,165

(114,095)

(17,070)

(131,165)

(105,956)

(17,578)

(123,534)

54,981

2,288

57,269

54,149

4,482

58,631

–

–

–

–

(6,870)

(388)

(7,258)

(6,548)

(648)

(7,196)

(29,533)

(3,720)

(33,253)

(32,008)

(2,952)

(34,960)

–

(7,997)

(7,997)

–

–

–

18,578

(9,817)

8,761

15,593

882

16,475

(654)

(51)

(705)

(191)

(6,206)

(6,397)

(672)

(445)

(52)

–

(724)

(445)

17,733

(16,074)

1,659

14,476

830

15,306

153

(3,109)

11

–

164

116

(3,109)

(3,240)

26

–

142

(3,240)

14,777

(16,063)

(1,286)

11,352

856

12,208

(4,031)

40

(3,991)

(2,849)

(836)

(3,685)

10,746

(16,023)

(5,277)

8,503

20

8,523

5

3

5

4

7

8

9

10,326

(16,023)

(5,697)

420

–

420

8,115

388

10,746

(16,023)

(5,277)

8,503

20

–

20

8,135

388

8,523

10

10

10

10

51.7

50.5

54.7

53.5

(28.5)

(28.5)

5.7

5.6

41.2

41.1

46.0

45.9

41.3

41.2

46.2

46.1

Continuing operations

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Other operating income

Distribution costs

Administrative expenses

Exceptional impairment of BGD operating assets

Operating profit/(loss) before amortisation 
of acquired intangibles and other 
exceptional items

Amortisation of acquired intangibles

Other exceptional items

Operating profit/(loss)

Finance income

Finance costs

(Loss)/profit before tax

Tax

(Loss)/profit for the year

(Loss)/profit for the year attributable to:

Owners of the parent

Non-controlling interests

(Loss)/earnings per share (cents)

Basic

Diluted

Adjusted basic

Adjusted diluted

78

Financial StatementsCONSOLIDATED STATEMENT 
OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2016

(Loss)/profit for the year

Items that may be reclassified to profit or loss

Foreign exchange translation differences

Cash flow hedge: gains/(losses) arising during the year

Cash flow hedge: reclassification adjustment for net income recognised directly in equity

Tax relating to items that may be reclassified to profit or loss

Restated 
(Note 1)
2015 
$’000 

8,523

2016 
$’000

(5,277)

706

(2,340)

150

–

(1,609)

(64)

68

(14)

Total comprehensive (expense)/income for the year

(6,030)

6,173

Total comprehensive (expense)/income for the year attributable to:

Owners of the parent

Non-controlling interests

(6,450)

420

(6,030)

5,799

374

6,173

79

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

AS AT 31 DECEMBER 2016

Non-current assets

Goodwill

Other intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets: Pre-publication costs

Deferred tax assets

Total non-current assets

Current assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Derivative financial instruments

Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities

Short term borrowings 

Derivative financial instruments

Trade and other payables

Tax payable

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Medium and long term borrowings

Deferred tax liabilities

Other payables

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity

Share capital

Paid in surplus

Retained earnings and other reserves

Equity attributable to owners of the parent

Non-controlling interests

Total equity

Notes

2016  

$’000

Restated
(Note 1) 
2015  

$’000

Restated
(Note 1) 
2014  

$’000

11

12

13

15

20

16

17

19

21

19

20

24

36,144

4,351

1,857

61,133

2,022

40,112

1,510

3,368

41,069

956

2,731

59,443

57,534

–

126

105,507

104,433

102,416

24,006

54,162

141

18,824

97,133

202,640

25,191

57,145

18

25,059

107,413

211,846

23,859

51,740

–

23,110

98,709

201,125

(5,000)

(5,000)

(89,150)

(94)

(59,718)

(4,060)

(10)

(63,716)

(2,549)

(67)

(53,271)

(2,430)

(68,872)

(71,275)

(144,918)

(75,748)

(79,562)

–

(10,502)

(3,407)

(7,466)

(5,927)

(99)

(537)

(89,657)

(87,127)

(6,464)

(158,529)

(158,402)

(151,382)

44,111

53,444

49,743

2,045

33,764

3,410

39,219

4,892

44,111

2,045

33,764

12,476

48,285

5,159

53,444

2,045

33,764

8,993

44,802

4,941

49,743

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 19 April 2017.  
They were signed on its behalf by:

Marcus E. Leaver, Director

80

Financial StatementsCONSOLIDATED STATEMENT  
OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2016

Share 
capital 
$’000

Paid in 
surplus 
$’000

Hedging 
reserve 
$’000

Translation 
reserve 
$’000

Treasury 
shares 
$’000

Retained 
earnings 
$’000

Equity 
attributable 
to owners 
of the 
parent 
$’000

Non-
controlling 
interests 
$’000

Total 
$’000

(5,611)

(634)

16,230

45,794

4,941

50,735

–

–

(992)

(992)

–

(992)

(5,611)

(634)

15,238

44,802

4,941

49,743

Balance at 1 January 2015  
(as previously stated)

2,045 33,764

Prior year adjustment (Note 1)

–

–

Balance at 1 January 2015

2,045 33,764

Profit for the period

Other comprehensive  
income/(expense)

Foreign exchange translation 
differences

Cash flow hedge: losses  
arising during the period

Cash flow hedge: 
reclassification adjustment  
for gain included in profit

Tax relating to items that may 
be reclassified to profit or loss

Total comprehensive  
income for the period

Dividends paid to shareholders

Dividends paid to  
non-controlling interests

Share based payments charge

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(64)

68

(14)

–

(2,326)

–

–

–

(10)

(2,326)

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

8,135

8,135

388

8,523

–

–

–

–

(2,326)

(14)

(2,340)

(64)

68

(14)

–

–

–

(64)

68

(14)

8,135

5,799

374

6,173

(2,502)

(2,502)

–

(2,502)

–

186

–

(156)

(156)

186

–

186

Balance at 31 December 2015

2,045 33,764

(10)

(7,937)

(634)

21,057

48,285

5,159 53,444

(Loss)/profit for the period

Other comprehensive  
income/expense

Foreign exchange translation 
differences

Cash flow hedge: losses  
arising during the period

Tax relating to items that may 
be reclassified to profit or loss

Total comprehensive income/ 
(expense) for the period

Dividends paid to shareholders

Dividends paid to non-
controlling interests

Share based payments charge

Shares released/sold from 
treasury shares

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

150

–

696

–

–

(1,609)

150

(913)

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(5,697)

(5,697)

420

(5,277)

–

–

–

696

150

(1,609)

10

706

–

–

150

(1,609)

(5,697)

(6,460)

430 (6,030)

(2,902)

(2,902)

–

(2,902)

–

256

634

(594)

–

(697)

(697)

256

40

–

–

256

40

Balance at 31 December 2016

2,045 33,764

140

(8,850)

–

12,120

39,219

4,892

44,111

81

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2016

(Loss)/profit for the year

Adjustments for:

Net finance costs

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment and software intangible assets

Tax charge

Exceptional impairment of BGD assets

Share-based payment charges

Amortisation of acquired intangibles 

Amortisation of and amount written off pre-publication costs

Movement in fair value of derivatives

Operating cash flows before movements in working capital

Decrease/(increase) in inventories

Decrease/(increase) in receivables

(Decrease)/increase in payables

Cash generated by operations

Income taxes paid

Net cash from operating activities

Investing activities

Interest received

Investment in pre-publication costs

Purchases of property, plant and equipment and software intangible assets

Acquisition of subsidiaries and business combinations

Net cash used in investing activities

Financing activities

Dividends paid

Interest payments

Drawdown/(repayment) of revolving credit facility

Repayment of term loan

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests

Net cash used in financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Foreign currency exchange differences on cash and cash equivalents

Restated
(Note 1) 
2015  

$’000

8,523

3,098

1,189

3,685

–

186

724

2016  

$’000

(5,277)

2,945

1,080

3,991

14,203

256

705

30,540

33,258

120

(85)

48,563

50,578

1,270

1,628

(7,715)

43,746

(1,436)

42,310

(1,198)

(6,156)

8,724

51,948

(1,981)

49,967

164

142

(37,165)

(34,872)

(1,562)

(3,718)

(2,010)

(1,614)

(42,281)

(38,354)

(2,902)

(2,725)

5,583

(5,000)

(697)

(5,741)

(5,712)

25,059

(523)

(2,502)

(2,891)

(3,283)

–

(156)

(8,832)

2,781

23,110

(832)

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

18,824

25,059

82

Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE  
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1 General information and significant accounting policies 
The Quarto Group, Inc. is a company incorporated in the State of Delaware, United States. The address of the registered 
office is given on page 123. The nature of the Group’s operations and its principal activities are set out in Note 3 and in 
the Chief Executive Officer’s Statement on page 12. 

The accounting policies adopted, are consistent with those of the annual financial statements for the year ended  
31 December 2015, as described in those financial statements, except as described below. 

Each entity in the Group determines its own functional currency and items included in the financial statements  
of each entity are measured using that functional currency. The presentational currency of the Group is US dollars. 

Change in estimate
During the year, the Group undertook a review of useful lives of the pre-publications costs incurred in the development 
of book titles prior to publication. The review resulted in the change in useful life of certain imprints to a three-year 
useful life in accordance with IAS 8 – Accounting Polices, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, the revisions 
were accounted for prospectively as a change in accounting estimate and as a result, the amortisation charge  
of the Group for the current financial year has been reduced by $2.1m.

Restatement of prior year results
In the process of finalising the results of the Books and Gifts Direct business for the year ended 31 December 2016, 
errors were uncovered in the cut-off procedures and accounting for returns in relation to stock in transit and the related 
liability accounts at BGD Australia. The errors related to the value attributed to stock in transit at each of the three  
years ended 31 December 2016, 31 December 2015 and 31 December 2014 where detailed examination has shown that 
supplier invoices for stock in transit were not processed in the correct accounting period, nor was the correct accrual  
or return provision recorded in the financial statements. The impact of these errors has resulted in the lower operating 
margins for the year ended 31 December 2015.

The error was caused by a failure in controls relating to cut-off and reconciliation procedures in respect of stock in 
transit and the related purchase clearing accounts, and accounting for returns on certain products.

The error has now been corrected and impacts the Consolidated Income Statement as follows:

•  Cost of sales for the year ended 31 December 2015 increased by $0.7m from $122.8m to $123.5m which is included  

in the restated operating results for the year; and 

•  Opening retained earnings as at 1 January 2015 have been restated and decreased by $1.0m. 

Expected tax losses of $0.5m have not been recognised as there is insufficient evidence that future profits are available 
against which the losses could be applied.

The impact on the Consolidated Balance Sheet as at 31 December 2015 and as at 31 December 2014 is:

Inventories

Trade payables

Impact on net assets

Impact on total equity

Earnings per share (cents)

Basic

Diluted

As reported 
2015 
$’000

Adjustment 
$’000

Restated
2015 
$’000

As reported 
2014 
$’000 

Adjustment 
$’000

26,147

(63,076)

55,040

(956)

(640)

(1,596)

25,191

(63,716)

53,444

24,851

(53,271)

50,735

(992)

–

(992)

Restated
2014 
$’000 

23,859

(53,271)

49,743

55,040

(1,596)

53,444

50,735

(992)

49,743

45.0

44.9

3.7

3.7

41.3

41.2

Statement of compliance 
The Group financial statements consolidate those of the Company and its subsidiaries (together referred to as the 
‘Group’). The parent company financial statements present information about the Company as a separate entity and not 
about its Group. 

The Group financial statements have been prepared and approved by the Directors in accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the EU (‘IFRS’). The Company has elected to prepare its parent company 
financial statements in accordance with UK GAAP, including The Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and 
Republic of Ireland (‘FRS 102’); these are presented on pages 116 to 121. 

83

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

1 General information and significant accounting policies continued
Basis of accounting 
The financial statements are prepared on the historical cost basis, except that derivative financial instruments are stated 
at fair value. 

Significant accounting estimates and judgements
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires management to make judgements, estimates 
and assumptions that affect the application of policies and reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and 
expenses. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and various other factors that 
are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates. The estimates 
and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the 
year in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that year or in the year of the revision and future years 
if the revision affects both current and future years. Key estimates at the balance sheet date are: 

Note 1: 

 The revenue recognition policy details our judgement in respect of sales returns and the method of  
estimating the related sales returns allowance

Note 5:  Assessment of the recoverable value of the net assets of the BGD business 

Note 11:  Key assumptions in making the assessment of carrying value of goodwill and acquired intangible assets

Note 15:  Recoverability of pre-publication costs and the assessment of their useful life 

Note 17:  Assessment of the impairment of trade receivables 

Note 20:  Calculation of temporary differences in the assessment of deferred tax liabilities 

There are no critical judgements that have a significant impact on the financial statements, apart from those involving 
estimates which are detailed above.

Going concern basis 
After making enquiries, the Directors have formed a judgement, at the time of approving the financial statements, that 
there is a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future. For this reason, the Directors continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial 
statements. See also the Group going concern and viability statement on pages 28 and 29. 

The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and 
position are set out in the Chief Executive Officer’s Statement on pages 12 to 15. 

The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are described in the 
Financial Review on pages 24 to 29 and in Notes 18 and 19 to the financial statements. 

The Group has considerable financial resources together with a number of customers and suppliers across different 
geographies. As a consequence, the Directors believe that the Group is well placed to manage its business risks 
successfully despite the current economic outlook. 

The Group has significant banking facilities including committed facilities comprising a US$90m multi-currency 
revolving credit and term loan facility. These facilities were agreed with the Group’s bankers on 6 February 2015 and 
expire on 30 April 2019. The Group has prepared a three-year financial plan comprising a budget for the year ending 
31 December 2017 together with projections for the two years ending 31 December 2019. These show that the Group  
is forecasting to have sufficient headroom within that period. The Group did not pass the CFADS covenant test at 
31 December 2016. This does not constitute a breach of the Group’s banking facilities as it was the first permitted time 
we have not passed the test and we are forecasting to pass the test at the next quarter testing date. The covenants will 
be monitored closely by the Board and we have identified mitigating actions that would maintain compliance with all 
covenants for the foreseeable future. 

Basis of consolidation 
The Group financial statements include the results of the Company and all of its subsidiary undertakings. A subsidiary  
is an entity controlled, directly or indirectly, by the Group. Control is the power to govern the financial and operating 
policies of the entity so as to obtain benefits from its activities. The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in 
the consolidated financial statements from the date that control commences until the date that control ceases. 

Intragroup balances and any unrealised gains and losses or income and expenses arising from intra-group transactions 
are eliminated in preparing the consolidated financial statements. 

84

Financial Statements1 General information and significant accounting policies continued
The interest of non-controlling interests on an acquisition is initially measured at the minority’s proportion of the net fair 
value of the assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities recognised. 

Business combinations, intangible assets and goodwill 
All business combinations are accounted for by applying the acquisition method. Goodwill represents the excess of the 
consideration transferred over the fair value of the net assets and any contingent liabilities acquired. Acquisition costs are 
expensed as incurred. 

Goodwill arising on acquisitions is stated at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is allocated to 
cash-generating units and is tested annually for impairment. 

Other intangible assets, such as backlists, that are acquired by the Group are stated at cost less accumulated 
amortisation and impairment losses. 

Amortisation of intangible assets is charged to profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of 
intangible assets. The amortisation period for non-contractual relationships is 2.5 years, for backlists is 5 years and software 
is 4 years. 

Volume rebates 
In the ordinary course of business, the Group receives volume rebates from its printers. This is accounted for in 
accordance with contractual terms and is credited in full to cost of sales. 

Impairment of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets including goodwill 
The carrying amount of the Group’s assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date to determine whether there is any 
indication of impairment. If any such indication exists, the asset’s recoverable amount is estimated. The recoverable 
amount is the higher of fair value, reflecting market conditions less costs to sell, and value in use based on an internal 
discounted cash flow valuation. 

For goodwill, the recoverable amount is estimated at each balance sheet date. An impairment loss is recognised 
whenever the carrying amount of an asset or its cash-generating unit exceeds its recoverable amount. Impairment 
losses are recognised in profit or loss. 

Revenue recognition 
Revenue comprises the fair value of the consideration received or receivable for the sale of goods and services, net 
of sales taxes, rebates and discounts, and after eliminating sales within the Group. For each of the Group’s operating 
segments, revenues are recognised on the despatch of goods and when the significant risks and rewards of ownership 
have been passed to the buyer. The following specific criteria also apply: 

•  The Group’s publishing revenues are stated net of an estimated allowance for sales returns, which is based on a 

review of the historical return patterns associated with the various sales outlets, as well as current market trends 
in the business in which the Group operates. 

•  Revenue from e-books is recognised when the content is delivered. 

Leasing 
Where assets are acquired under finance leases (including hire purchase contracts), which confer risks and rewards 
similar to those attached to owned assets, the amount representing the outright purchase price of such assets is 
included in property, plant and equipment. All other leases are classified as operating leases. Depreciation is provided  
in accordance with the accounting policy below. The capital element of future finance lease payments is included in 
liabilities and the interest element is charged to the income statement over the period of the lease in proportion to  
the capital element outstanding. Expenditure on operating leases is charged to the income statement on a straight  
line basis. 

Foreign currencies 
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated at the foreign exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. 
Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at the balance sheet date are translated at the 
exchange rate ruling at that date with any exchange differences arising on retranslation being recognised in the  
income statement. 

85

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

1 General information and significant accounting policies continued
The assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on consolidation, 
are translated into US Dollars at exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. The revenues and expenses of foreign 
operations are translated into US Dollars at average annual exchange rates. Foreign exchange differences arising on 
retranslation are charged or credited to other comprehensive income and are recognised in the currency translation 
reserve in equity. On disposal of a foreign operation, the related cumulative translation differences recognised in equity 
are reclassified to profit or loss and are recognised as part of the gain or loss on disposal. 

Exceptional items 
Exceptional items are those which the Group defines as significant items outside the scope of normal business that 
need to be disclosed by virtue of their size or incidence in order for the user to obtain a proper understanding of the 
financial information. 

Retirement benefit costs 
The Group’s pension costs relate to individual pension plans and are charged to profit or loss as they fall due. 

Taxation 
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises both current and deferred tax. Current tax is the expected tax payable 
on the taxable income for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date, and  
any adjustments to tax payable in respect of previous years. Tax provisions are based on Management’s interpretation 
of country specific tax law and recognised when it is considered probable that there will be a future outflow of funds to 
a tax authority. Provisions are made annually based on the specific information available at that time and therefore there 
is limited risk of change in the estimates in the short term. Deferred tax is provided using the balance sheet liability 
method, providing for temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial 
reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. However, deferred tax is not provided on the initial 
recognition of goodwill, nor on the initial recognition of an asset or a liability unless the related transaction is a business 
combination or effects tax or accounting profit. Not all temporary differences give rise to deferred tax assets/liabilities. 
A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available 
against which the asset can be utilised. Changes in deferred tax assets or liabilities are recognised as a component of 
tax expense in the income statement, except where they relate to items that are charged or credited directly to other 
comprehensive income or equity, in which case the related deferred tax is also charged or credited directly to other 
comprehensive income or equity, respectively. 

Property, plant and equipment 
Property, plant and equipment are stated at deemed cost less accumulated depreciation and any provision for 
impairments in value. 

The Group recognises in the carrying amount of property, plant and equipment the subsequent costs of replacing part 
of such items when there are future economic benefits. All other costs are recognised in profit or loss as an expense  
as they are incurred. 

Depreciation is provided on a straight-line basis to write off the cost, less the estimated residual value, of property,  
plant and equipment over their estimated useful lives, which are reviewed annually. Where parts of an item of plant  
and equipment have separate lives, they are accounted for and depreciated as separate items. Residual values are 
reassessed on an annual basis. Land is not depreciated. 

Estimated useful lives are as follows: 

Freehold property and long leasehold property improvements

50 years 

Short leasehold property improvements

Over the period of the lease 

Plant, equipment and motor vehicles

Fixtures and fittings 

4 to 10 years 

5 to 7 years

Assets held under finance leases are depreciated over their expected useful lives on the same basis as owned assets  
or, where shorter, over the term of the relevant lease. 

The gain or loss arising on the disposal or retirement of an asset is determined as the difference between the sales 
proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and is recognised in income. 

86

Financial Statements1 General information and significant accounting policies continued
Pre-publication costs 
Pre-publication costs represent directly attributable costs and attributable overheads incurred in the development  
of book titles prior to their publication. Attributable overheads are allocated on a title by title basis. These costs are 
carried forward in current intangible assets where the book title will generate future economic benefits and costs  
can be measured reliably. These costs are amortised on a straight line basis upon publication of the book title over 
estimated economic lives of three years or less, being an estimate of the expected useful economic life of a book title. 
The investment in pre-publication costs has been disclosed as part of the investing activities in the cash flow statement. 

Inventories 
Inventory is valued at the lower of cost, including an appropriate portion of overheads, and net realisable value, on a 
first in, first out basis. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business, less estimated 
costs of completion and selling expenses. 

Financial instruments 
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised on the Group’s balance sheet when the group becomes a party 
to the contractual provisions of the instrument. 

Financial assets 
Financial assets other than hedging instruments are divided into the following categories: 

•  loans and receivables; and 
•  financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Financial assets are assigned to the different categories on initial recognition, depending on the characteristics of the 
instrument and its purpose. A financial instrument’s category is relevant for the way it is measured and whether any 
resulting income and expenses is recognised in profit or loss or directly in equity. See Note 22 for a summary of the 
Group’s financial assets by category. 

Generally, the Group recognises all financial assets using trade date accounting. An assessment of whether a financial 
asset is impaired is made at least at each reporting date. All income and expense relating to financial assets are 
recognised in the income statement line item ‘finance costs’ or ‘finance income’, respectively, with the exception  
of trade and other receivables which are recorded in revenue and administrative expenses. 

Loans and receivables, including trade receivables, are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable 
payments that are not quoted in an active market. After initial recognition, at fair value, these are measured at 
amortised cost using the effective interest method, less provision for impairment. Any change in their value is 
recognised in profit or loss. The Group’s trade and most other receivables fall into this category of financial  
instruments. Discounting, however, is omitted where the effect of discounting is immaterial. 

Significant receivables are considered for impairment on a case-by-case basis when they are past due at the balance 
sheet date or when objective evidence is received that a specific counterparty will default. All other receivables are 
reviewed for impairment in groups, which are determined by reference to the industry and region of a counterparty  
and other available features of shared credit risk characteristics, if any. The percentage of the write-down is then based 
on recent historical counterparty default rates for each identified group. 

Derivative financial instruments are initially recognised at fair value, and subsequently classified as financial assets at 
fair value through profit and loss. Any gain or loss arising from derivative financial instruments is based on changes in 
fair value, which is determined by direct reference to active market transactions or using a valuation technique where 
no active market exists. 

Financial liabilities 
The Group’s financial liabilities include borrowings, trade and other payables (including finance lease liabilities). 

After initial recognition at fair value, all financial liabilities, with the exception of derivative financial instruments, are 
measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. A summary of the Group’s financial liabilities by 
category is given in Note 22. 

All of the Group’s derivative financial instruments that are not designated as hedging instruments in accordance with 
the strict conditions explained under the heading ‘Derivative financial instruments and hedge accounting’, are 
accounted for at fair value through profit or loss by definition. 

87

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

1 General information and significant accounting policies continued
Financial liabilities and equity instruments 
Financial liabilities and equity instruments are classified according to the substance of the contractual arrangements 
entered into. An equity instrument is any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of the Group after 
deducting all of financial liabilities. 

Finance costs 
Finance costs comprise interest payable on borrowings calculated using the effective interest method together with 
the amortisation of debt issuance costs. 

Finance income 
Finance income comprises interest receivable, which is recognised in profit or loss as it accrues using the effective 
interest method. 

Cash and cash equivalents 
For the purposes of the statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances, call deposits and 
bank overdrafts that form an integral part of the Group’s cash management processes. 

Derivative financial instruments and hedge accounting 
The Group’s activities expose it primarily to the financial risks of changes in foreign currency exchange rates and 
interest rates. The Group uses interest rate swap contracts to hedge these exposures. The Group does not use 
derivative financial instruments for speculative purposes. 

The use of financial derivatives is governed by the Group’s policies approved by the Board of Directors, which provide 
written principles on the use of financial derivatives. 

Where a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the variability in cash flows of a recognised asset  
or liability, or a highly probable forecast transaction, the effective part of any gain or loss on the derivative financial 
instrument is recognised directly in other comprehensive income. If the cash flow of a firm commitment or forecast 
transaction results in the recognition of an asset or a liability, then, at the time the asset or liability is recognised, the 
associated gains or losses on the derivative that had previously been recognised in equity are included in initial 
recognition of that asset or liability. Amounts previously recognised in other comprehensive income are recognised in 
the profits and loss in the same period in which the hedged item affects net profit or loss. Changes in the fair value of 
derivative financial instruments that do not qualify for hedge accounting are recognised in profit or loss as they arise. 

The Group’s derivatives are split between level 1 and level 2 financial instruments under IFRS 7. The foreign currency 
exchange rate derivatives are level 1 and they are valued based on a quoted price in an active market. The interest rate 
swaps are level 2 financial instruments and they are valued using techniques based significantly on observable market 
data such as yield curves as at the balance sheet date. 

Hedge accounting is discontinued when the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated, or exercised, or no longer 
qualifies for hedge accounting. At that time, any cumulative gain or loss on the hedging instrument recognised in equity 
is retained in other comprehensive income until the forecast transaction occurs. If a hedged transaction is no longer 
expected to occur, the net cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is transferred to net  
profit or loss for the period. 

Treasury shares 
Treasury shares represent holdings of the Company’s own equity instruments. No gain or loss is recognised in profit or 
loss on the purchase, issue or cancellation of these equity instruments. Consideration paid or received is recognised 
directly in equity. 

Share-based payments 
The Group issues equity settled share-based payments to certain employees. Equity settled share-based payments are 
measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value, determined at the grant date, of equity settled share-based 
payments is expensed on a straight line basis over the vesting period, based on the Group’s estimate of shares that will 
eventually vest. 

The fair value of employee share option grants is calculated using a Monte Carlo model, taking into account the terms 
and conditions upon which the options were granted. The value of the charge is adjusted to reflect expected and actual 
levels of options vesting. 

88

Financial Statements1 General information and significant accounting policies continued
Borrowing costs 
All borrowing costs are recognised in the income statement in the period in which they are incurred. Debt issuance 
costs comprising arrangement fees and legal costs are capitalised and amortised on a straight line basis over the period 
of the borrowing facility or included within the amortised cost calculation as appropriate. The annual amortisation 
charge is included within finance costs in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income. 

The Group does not incur any borrowing costs which are directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or 
production of qualifying assets. 

Financial risk management 
The principal risk factors faced by the Group are disclosed in Note 22 and on page 104. 

New standards and interpretations not applied 
The International Accounting Standards Board and the International Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC)  
have issued the following standards and interpretations for annual periods beginning on or after the effective dates 
noted below. 

IAS/IFRS Standard

Effective for years starting on or after

IFRS 9 

IFRS 15 

IFRS 16 

IAS 7 

IAS 12 

Financial Instruments 

Revenue from contracts with customers 

Leases 

1 January 2018

1 January 2018 

1 January 2019

Amendments to IAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows 

1 January 2017 

Amendments to Recognition of Deferred Tax Assets for 
Unrealised Losses 

1 January 2017 

The potential impact of the future adoption of IFRS 15 and IFRS 16 on the Group’s accounts is ongoing and it is not 
practical to provide a reasonable estimate of the impact until this review is completed. Apart from these standards, the 
Directors do not consider that the adoption of the other standards listed above will have a material impact on the 
Group’s accounts in the period of initial application.

2 Revenue

Sales of goods

Finance income

Total

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

188,434

182,165 

164

142 

188,598 

182,307

89

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

3 Operating segments
The analysis by segment is presented below. This is based upon the operating results as reviewed by the Chief 
Executive Officer.

Quarto 
International 
Co-Editions 
Group 
$’000

Quarto 
Publishing 
Group USA
$’000

Quarto 
Publishing 
Group UK
$’000

51,915

9,372

81,189

9,589

21,506

2,777

Total 
Publishing 
$’000

154,610

21,738

Books & 
Gifts Direct, 
ANZ
$’000

Quarto HK
$’000

19,358

(9,817)*

14,466

1,589

Total
$’000

188,434

13,510

(253)

(356)

(45)

(654)

(51)

–

(705)

9,119

–

9,119

–

9,233

(191)

2,732

21,084

–

(191)

(9,868)

(6,206)

9,042

2,732

20,893

(16,074)

–

–

–

–

1,589

–

1,589

–

2016

Revenue

Operating profit/(loss) 
before amortisation of 
acquired intangibles and 
exceptional items

Amortisation of acquired 
intangibles

Segment result

Other exceptional items 
(Note 5) 

Unallocated corporate 
expenses

Operating profit/(loss)

9,119

9,042

2,732

20,893

(16,074)

1,589

Finance income

Finance costs

(Loss)/profit before tax

Tax

(Loss)/profit after tax 

Capital expenditure

Depreciation

Investment in pre-
publication costs

Amortisation of pre-
publication costs

(662)

406

(739)

320

(20)

159

15,506

17,363

4,296

(1,421)

885

37,165

14,580

13,017

2,943

30,540

(134)

147

–

–

(8)

48

–

–

* 

Includes exceptional impairment charge of $8.0m. Further detail is included in Note 5.

90

12,805

(6,397)

6,408

(4,749)

1,659

164

(3,109)

(1,286)

(3,991)

(5,277)

(1,563)

1,080

37,165

30,540

Financial Statements3 Operating segments continued

Quarto 
International 
Co-Editions 
Group 
$’000

Quarto 
Publishing 
Group USA
$’000

Quarto 
Publishing 
Group UK
$’000

50,147

6,351

72,441

8,884

22,765

3,302

Total 
Publishing 
$’000

145,353

18,537

Books & 
Gifts Direct, 
ANZ
$’000

22,060

882

Quarto HK
$’000

14,752

1,487

Total
$’000

182,165

20,906

(240)

(346)

(86)

(672)

(52)

–

(724)

6,111

8,538

3,216

17,865

830

1,487

529

539

773

329

38

181

1,340

1,049

15,724

14,888

4,260

34,872

16,246

13,014

3,998

33,258

546

86

–

–

124

54

–

–

20,182

(445)

(4,431)

15,306

142

(3,240)

12,208

(3,685)

8,523

2,010

1,189

34,872

33,258

2015 (restated)

Revenue

Operating profit before 
amortisation of acquired 
intangibles and exceptional 
items

Amortisation of acquired 
intangibles

Segment result

Other exceptional items 

Unallocated corporate 
expenses

Operating (loss)/profit

Finance income

Finance costs

(Loss)/profit before tax

Tax

(Loss)/profit after tax 

Capital expenditure

Depreciation

Investment in pre-
publication costs

Amortisation of pre-
publication costs

91

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

3 Operating segments continued
Balance sheet

Quarto Publishing Group USA

Quarto Publishing Group UK

Quarto International Co-Editions Group

Books & Gifts Direct, ANZ

Quarto HK

Unallocated (Deferred tax and cash)

Total assets

Quarto Publishing Group USA

Quarto Publishing Group UK

Quarto International Co-Editions Group

Books & Gifts Direct, ANZ

Quarto HK

Unallocated (Deferred tax and cash)

Total liabilities

Geographical areas
The Group operates in the following main geographic areas:

United States of America

Australasia and Far East

United Kingdom

Europe

Rest of the World

2016 
$’000

110,010

17,277

46,055

1,720

6,591

20,987

202,640

29,569

5,851

18,668

5,141

3,895

95,405

158,529

Restated
(Note 1) 
2015  

$’000

92,154

20,562

49,957

16,285

7,811

25,077

211,846

22,567

7,848

23,246

5,829

4,325

94,587

158,402

Revenue

Non-current assets

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

2016  

$’000

Restated
(Note 1) 
2015  

$’000

104,109

92,758

68,586

55,507

25,172

20,900

26,303

11,950

188,434

28,556

24,150

24,453

12,248

182,165

98

36,823

–

–

8,066

39,304

1,556

–

105,507

104,433

92

Financial Statements4 Operating profit
Operating profit has been arrived at after charging/(crediting):

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Foreign currency exchange differences

Amortisation of acquired intangibles

Amortisation of pre-publication costs 

Staff costs (Note 6)

Auditor’s remuneration (see below)

Cost of inventory recognised as an expense 

Share based payment charges

Loss/(gain) on derivative financial instruments recognised at fair value through profit and loss

Exceptional items (Note 5)

Auditor’s remuneration

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor for the audit of the Company’s annual accounts

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor and its associates for the audit of subsidiary companies

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor for other assurance services

5 Exceptional items

Impairment of BGD assets

Write-off of BGD goodwill

Write-off of BGD intangible assets

Acquisition costs

Aborted corporate transaction costs

Other exceptional items

Total

2016  

$’000

1,080

241

705

30,540

34,274

604

41,474

256

120

14,394

30

567

7

604

2016  

$’000

7,997

6,000

206

191

–

6,397

14,394

Restated

2015  

$’000

1,189

(118)

724

33,258

30,843

408

43,413

186

(85)

445

30

370

8

408

2015  

$’000

–

–

–

257

188

445

445

The impairment of assets comprises principally inventory of $1.9m, trade receivables of $4.3m and property, plant  
and equipment of $1.1m. This impairment and the write-off of goodwill and intangible assets reflect the changes to 
reduce the carrying value of the assets of BGD to their recoverable value. There are no tax credits associated with  
these impairments.

Acquisition costs relate to the purchase of the assets of becker&mayer and Harvard Common Press with a related tax 
credit of $65,000 (2015: purchase of the Ivy Press Limited).

93

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

6 Staff costs

Average monthly number of employees (excluding Executive Directors)

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Other pension costs

2016  

Number

2015  

Number

499

434

$’000

30,869

2,296

1,109

$’000

27,560

2,119

1,164

34,274

30,843

Directors’ remuneration is disclosed in the Remuneration Committee Report on page 46.

The remuneration of Directors and the Executive Committee, who are the key management personnel of the Group, 
is set out below in aggregate for each of the categories specified in IAS 24 Related Party Disclosures.

Short term employee benefits

Long term employee benefits

Post-employment benefits

7 Finance income

Interest income on financial assets carried at amortised cost

8 Finance costs

Interest expense on borrowings

Amortisation of debt issuance costs

2016
$’000

2,735

2,650

256

5,641

2016  

$’000

164

2016  

$’000

2,728

381

3,109

2015
$’000

3,424

–

317

3,741

2015  

$’000

142

2015  

$’000

2,837

403

3,240

94

Financial Statements9 Taxation

Current tax

Corporation tax

Total current tax

Deferred tax (Note 20)

Origination and reversal of temporary differences

Total tax expense

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

2,344 

2,344 

1,647

1,647

3,991

2,277 

2,277 

1,408 

1,408

3,685

Corporation tax on UK profits is calculated at 20%, based on the UK standard rate of corporation tax, (2015: 20.25%)  
of the estimated assessable profit for the year. Taxation for other jurisdictions is calculated at the rates prevailing in the 
respective jurisdictions. The table below explains the difference between the expected expense at the UK statutory rate 
of 20% and the Group’s total tax expense for the year.

(Loss)/profit before tax

Tax at the UK corporation tax rate of 20% (2015: 20.25%)

Effect of different tax rates of subsidiaries operating in other 
jurisdictions

Tax effect of items that are not deductible in determining taxable profit

Other

Tax expense

Effective tax rate for the year

Group 
excluding 
Books & 
Gifts Direct 
$’000

Books & 
Gifts Direct 
$’000

14,777

2,956

1,095

64

(84)

4,031

27.3%

(16,063)

(3,213)

–

3,173

–

(40)

2016  
Group  
$’000

(1,286)

(257)

1,095

3,237

(84)

3,991

Restated 
(Note 1) 
2015  
Group  
$’000

12,208

2,472

1,163

50

–

3,685

30.2%

The effective tax rate for the year excluding BGD is 27.3% (2015: 25.1%).

95

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

10 Earnings per share

(Loss)/profit attributable to owners  
of the parent

Amortisation of acquired intangibles  
(net of tax)

Exceptional items (net of tax)

Adjusted profit/(loss) attributable  
to owners of the parent

Number of shares

Weighted average number  
of ordinary shares

Group
excluding 
Books & 
Gifts Direct
$’000

Books & 
Gifts Direct
$’000

2016

Group
$’000

Group
excluding 
Books & 
Gifts Direct
$’000

Restated
(Note 1) 
Books & 
Gifts Direct
$’000

10,326

(16,023)

(5,697)

473

126

10,925

36

509

6,206

(9,781)

6,332

1,144

8,115

508

441

9,064

20

18

–

38

Number

19,984,824

Number

Number

19,984,824

19,696,729

Effect of potentially dilutive share options

452,031

452,031

38,591

Diluted weighted average number  
of ordinary shares

(Loss)/earnings per share (cents)

Basic

Diluted

Adjusted earnings per share (cents)

Basic

Diluted

20,436,855

20,436,855

19,735,320

51.7

50.5

54.7

53.5

(28.5)

(28.5)

5.7

5.6

41.2

41.1

46.0

45.9

2015

Restated
(Note 1) 
Group
$’000

8,135

526

441

9,102

Number

19,696,729

38,591

19,735,320

41.3

41.2

46.2

46.1

96

Financial Statements11 Goodwill

Cost

At 1 January

Exchange differences

Recognised on acquisitions (Note 30)

At 31 December

Accumulated impairment losses

At 1 January

Impairment

Exchange differences

At 31 December

Carrying value

At 31 December

Impairment tests for cash generating units containing goodwill
The following units have significant carrying amounts of goodwill:

Quarto Publishing Group USA (QUS)

Quarto Publishing Group UK (QUK)

Quarto International Co-Editions Group (QIC)

Books & Gifts Direct, ANZ (BGD)

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

2014  

$’000

40,448

(1,128)

3,105

41,423

(1,244)

269

41,744

(971)

650

42,425

40,448

41,423

(336)

(6,000)

55

(354)

(377)

–

18

–

23

(6,281)

(336)

(354)

36,144

40,112

41,069

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

2014  

$’000

29,982

26,878

26,878

1,816

4,346

–

2,176

5,145

5,913

2,293

5,171

6,727

36,144

40,112

41,069

The recoverable amount of each cash generating unit (‘CGU’) is based on the value in use basis. In determining value  
in use, management prepare a detailed bottom up budget, with reviews conducted at each business unit. Cash flows 
beyond the budget period of twelve months are extrapolated into perpetuity, by applying the growth and rates 
applicable to each unit discounted to present value. The key assumptions used in the value in use calculations were:

•  Discount rate: 14.57% (2015: 11.58%) pre-tax for QUS, 11.66% (2015: 12.17%) for QUK and QIC and 15.60% (2015: 11.58%) 
for BGD which reflects current assessments of the time value of money. The discount rate has been calculated using 
Weighted Average Cost of Capital analysis adjusted to derive the pre-tax discount rate.

•  Cash flow growth rates: based on a short term forecast growth rate of 2% (2015: 3%) for the next three years,  

and reverting to 3% (2015:3%)into perpetuity, to reflect the long term expected growth in each of the key markets. 
Changes in selling prices and direct costs are based on past experience and expectations of future changes in  
the market.

Determining whether goodwill, specific to the US, is impaired requires an estimation of the value of use of each 
CGU based on the key assumptions above. The headroom of the US CGU as at 31 December 2015 was $5.0m 
(2015: $12.7m). Neither a 0.9% decrease in the long term growth rate or a 0.6% increase in the discount rate would  
have led to an impairment.

97

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

12 Other intangible assets

Cost

At 1 January 2015

Exchange differences

Recognised on acquisitions (Note 30)

Disposals

At 1 January 2016

Transfer

Exchange differences

Recognised on acquisitions (Note 30)

Impairment charge for the year

Transfer from property, plant & equipment

At 31 December 2016

Amortisation and impairment

At 1 January 2015

Exchange differences

Charge for the year

Disposals

At 1 January 2016

Transfer

Exchange differences

Charge for the year

Impairment charge for the year

Transfer from Property, plant & equipment

At 31 December 2016

Carrying amount

At 31 December 2016

At 31 December 2015

At 31 December 2014

Non-
contractual 
relationships 
$’000

Backlists 
$’000

Software 
$’000

Total 
$’000

1,080

18,493

(55)

–

(1,025)

–

1,033

28

–

(1,061)

–

–

(223)

1,365

–

19,635

(1,033)

(458)

2,980

–

–

21,124

1,080

17,537

(55)

–

(1,025)

–

782

22

51

(855)

–

–

–

– 

– 

(136)

724

–

18,125

(782)

(296)

654

–

–

17,701

3,423

1,510

956

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

– 

–

2,312

2,312

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1,384

1,384

928

–

–

19,573

(278)

1,365

(1,025)

19,635

–

(430)

2,980

(1,061)

2,312

23,436

18,617

(191)

724

(1,025)

18,125

–

(274)

705

(855)

1,384

19,085

4,351

1,510

956

98

Financial Statements13 Property, Plant and Equipment

Leasehold 
Property 
Improvements 
$’000

Plant, 
Equipment & 
Motor 
Vehicles 
$’000

Fixtures & 
Fittings 
$’000

Cost

At 1 January 2015

Exchange difference 

Recognised on acquisitions

Additions 

Disposals 

At 1 January 2016

Exchange difference 

Recognised on acquisitions (Note 30)

Additions 

Impairment charge for the year

Disposals 

Transfer to intangible assets

At 31 December 2016

Depreciation

At 1 January 2015

Exchange differences

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

At 1 January 2016

Exchange differences 

Charge for the year 

Impairment charge for the year

Disposals 

Transfer to intangible assets

At 31 December 2016

Net book value

At 31 December 2016

At 31 December 2015

At 31 December 2014

857

(46)

–

253

(2)

1,062

(105)

–

425

(54)

(78)

– 

1,250

498

(25)

193

–

666

(76)

188

(48)

(77)

– 

653

597

396

359

4,527

(335)

2

1,525

(177)

5,542

(266)

175

1,115

(2,134)

(1,070)

(2,312)

1,050

2,718

(206)

825

(177)

3,160

(158)

682

(1,020)

(1,070)

(1,384)

210

840

2,382

1,809

984

(38)

–

232

(58)

1,120

(86)

85

22

(56)

(89)

– 

996

421

(8)

171

(54)

530

(48)

210

(32)

(84)

– 

576

420

590

563

99

Total  

$’000

6,368

(419)

2

2,010

(237)

7,724

(457)

260

1,562

(2,244)

(1,237)

(2,312)

3,296

3,637

(239)

1,189

(231)

4,356

(282)

1,080

(1,100)

(1,231)

(1,384)

1,439

1,857

3,368

2,731

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

14 Subsidiaries
A list of the significant investments in subsidiaries, including the name, country of incorporation and proportion of 
ownership interest is given in Note 5 to the Company’s balance sheet. All of these subsidiaries are included in the 
consolidated results.

15 Intangible Assets – Pre-publication costs

Cost

At 1 January

Exchange differences

Transfer from inventories

Recognised on acquisitions (Note 30)

Additions

At 31 December

Amortisation

At 1 January

Exchange differences

Charge for the year

At 31 December

Carrying Amount

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

2014  

$’000

151,733

117,077

102,701

(7,671)

(2,217)

(2,774)

–

564

37,165

181,791

–

2,001

34,872

151,733

660

102

33,525

134,214

92,290

59,543

46,480

(2,172)

(511)

(733)

30,540

120,658

61,133

33,258

92,290

59,443

30,933

76,680

57,534

The amortisation charge is included in cost of sales in the Consolidated Income Statement. The assessment of the  
useful life of pre-publication costs and amortisation involves a significant amount of judgement based on historical 
trends. A review of useful lives took place during the year. Details are included in Note 1.

16 Inventories

Finished goods

Work in progress

Raw materials

Restated
(Note 1) 
2015  

$’000

Restated
(Note 1) 
2014  

$’000

2016  

$’000

23,655

24,933

23,533

153

198

151

107

114

212

24,006

25,191

23,859

All of the Group’s inventories have been reviewed for indicators of impairment. Certain inventories were found to be 
impaired and a provision of $4,360,000 (2015: $1,649,000) has been recorded accordingly. This includes an exceptional 
impairment charge of $1,630,000 in respect of Books & Gifts Direct.

100

Financial Statements17 Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables

Other receivables and prepayments

2016  

$’000

42,259

11,903

54,162

2015  

$’000

45,475

11,670

57,145

2014  

$’000

40,225

11,515

51,740

The average credit period on sales of goods is 70 days (2015: 65 days).

The Group’s trade and other receivables have been reviewed for indicators of impairment. Certain trade receivables, 
including certain trade receivables not yet due, were not considered to be recoverable and a provision of $670,000 
(2015: $908,000) has been recorded accordingly. The trade receivables considered irrecoverable relate to customers 
which are experiencing trading difficulties. In addition, some of the recoverable trade receivables are past due as at the 
reporting date. The extent of financial assets past due but not impaired is as follows:

Less than one month

More than one month but less than two months

More than two months but less than three months

More than three months but less than six months

More than six months

2016  

$’000

3,869

765

270

92

82

5,078

2015  

$’000

3,338

1,182

339

599

73

5,531

2014  

$’000

3,018

783

342

823

444

5,410

The Group has not provided against these receivables as there has not been a significant change in credit quality and 
the Group believes they are still recoverable. No collateral is held over these balances.

Movement in allowance for doubtful debts:

Balance at beginning of year

On acquisition of subsidiaries

Amounts written off in the year

Amounts recovered during the year

Exchange difference

Increase in allowance recognised in profit or loss

Balance at end of the year

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

2014  

$’000

908

–

(682)

11

(66)

499

670

1,509

46

(1,571)

150

(26)

800

908

1,185

–

(434)

337

(16)

437

1,509

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximates to their fair value. Trade 
receivables are disclosed after deducting a reserve for sales returns. The reserve is calculated based on a time lag 
between sales and returns and historical return patterns.

18 Cash and cash equivalents

Bank balances

Short term deposits

Cash and cash equivalents

2016  

$’000

12,824

6,000

18,824

2015  

$’000

18,274

6,785

25,059

2014  

$’000

13,375

9,735

23,110

The carrying amount of these assets approximates to their fair value.

The effective interest rates on bank balances and short term deposits was 0.2% (2015: 0.4%).

101

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

19 Borrowings

Bank loans

On demand or within one year

In the second year

In the third to fifth years inclusive

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

80,748

5,000

5,000

70,748

80,748

84,562

5,000

5,000

74,562

84,562

2014  

$’000

89,150

89,150

–

–

89,150

Less: Amount due for settlement within 12 months (shown under current liabilities)

(5,000)

(5,000)

(89,150)

Amount due for settlement after 12 months

75,748

79,562

–

US dollar borrowings

Other currency borrowings

As at 31 December 2016

US dollar borrowings

Other currency borrowings

As at 31 December 2015

US dollar borrowings

Other currency borrowings

As at 31 December 2014

Total  

$’000

Fixed rate 
borrowings 
$’000

Variable rate 
borrowings 
$’000

56,500

30,000

24,248

80,748

57,000

27,562

84,562

60,000

29,150

89,150

–

30,000

30,000

–

30,000

–

–

–

26,500

24,248

50,748

27,000

27,562

54,562

60,000

29,150

89,150

Weighted 
average 
interest rate 
for fixed rate 
borrowings 
%

Average
 time over 
which 
interest rate 
is fixed 
Months

3.6

–

3.6

3.5

–

3.5

–

–

–

19.5

–

19.5

19.5

–

19.5

–

–

–

The variable rate borrowings bear interest by reference to LIBOR plus a margin. At 31 December 2016, undrawn 
borrowing facilities totalled $8,320,000 (2015: $16,540,000).

The Directors estimate the fair value of the Group’s borrowings to be equal to book value, by reference to market rates.

The above borrowings carry interest based on LIBOR plus a margin of between 2.1% and 2.8%, depending on the 
leverage ratio and are secured on the assets of the Group.

At 31 December 2016 the Group had a US$90m (2015: US$95m) multi-currency syndicated bank facility which is due  
to expire on 30 April 2019.

These facilities are subject to three principal covenants.

Consolidated net debt shall not exceed three times EBITDA

2016

2015

1.76 times

1.63 times

Consolidated adjusted operating profit shall exceed three times net interest payable

6.15 times

5.55 times

Cash flow shall exceed 1.2 times Debt Service

0.74 times

3.89 times

The cashflow cover covenant test was not passed at 31 December 2016; this does not constitute a breach of the Group’s 
banking facilities. The agreement states that if on a quarter end test date the cashflow covenant test is not complied 
with due to an adverse movement in working capital, then it shall not constitute a breach provided that it is the first 
time that such non-compliance has occurred, and on the following test date, the covenant is complied with. The 
seasonality of the industry means there is always a degree of sensitivity around the Group’s working capital movements. 
Having identified mitigating actions which would maintain working capital headroom in such situations, the Directors 
are confident that the Group will comply with all financial covenants for the foreseeable future.

102

Financial Statements20 Deferred tax

Deferred tax liabilities

Excess of capital allowances over depreciation – UK

Other temporary differences – UK

Other temporary differences – US

Other overseas temporary differences

Deferred tax assets

Other temporary differences – US

Net deferred taxation liability

The movement on the net provision for deferred taxation is as follows:

Net provision at 1 January

Acquisitions

Exchange difference through other comprehensive income

Charge/(credit) to profit and loss

Net provision at 31 December

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

2014  

$’000

48

5,369

5,417

4,909

176

10,502

(2,022)

8,480

2016  

$’000

7,466

–

56

1,647

8,480

59

4,190

4,249

2,924

293

7,466

–

7,466

2015  

$’000

5,801

394

(137)

1,408

7,466

25

4,493

4,518

1,545

(136)

5,927

(126)

5,801

2014  

$’000

5,452

145

(305)

509

5,801

At the balance sheet date, the group had no tax losses (2015: $2.9m) available for offset against future profits.

At the balance sheet date, the aggregate amount of temporary differences associated with undistributed earnings  
of subsidiaries for which deferred tax has not been recognised was $22.7m (2015: $20.2m). The Group has not 
recognised the amount as it is able to control the timing of the reversal of these temporary differences and it is 
probable that they will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

21 Trade and other payables

Trade payables

Other payables

Total

Restated
(Note 1) 
2015  

$’000

Restated
(Note 1) 
2014  

$’000

49,856

13,860

63,716

44,047

9,224

53,271

2016  

$’000

43,423 

16,295 

59,718

Other payables includes contingent consideration payments and loan notes of $5.8m in respect of current year 
acquisitions. The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade payables approximates to their fair value.

103

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

22 Risk management objectives and policies
The Group is exposed to market risk through its use of financial instruments and specifically to currency risk, interest 
rate risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and certain other price risks, which result from both its operating and investing 
activities. The Group’s risk management is coordinated at its headquarters, in close co-operation with the Board of 
Directors, and focuses on actively securing the Group’s short to medium-term cash flows by minimising the exposure  
to financial markets.

The Group does not actively engage in the trading of financial assets for speculative purposes nor does it write options. 
The most significant financial risks to which the Group is exposed and a summary of financial assets and liabilities by 
category are described below.

Foreign currency sensitivity
Exposures to currency exchange rates arise from the Group’s overseas sales and costs, which are primarily denominated 
in Sterling.

Foreign currency denominated financial assets and liabilities, translated into US Dollars at the closing rate, are  
as follows:

Financial assets

Financial liabilities

Short-term exposure

Financial liabilities

Long-term exposure

At 31 December 

$’000

Sterling

6,691

2016

$’000

Other

7,103

(2,880)

(6,599)

3,811

504

(21,082)

(17,271)

(3,168)

(2,664)

$’000

Sterling

44

(123)

(79)

–

(79)

2015

$’000

Other

5,423

(4,497)

926

(3,265)

(2,339)

The following table illustrates the sensitivity of the net result for the year and equity in regards to the Group’s financial 
assets and financial liabilities and the US Dollar – Sterling exchange rate.

It assumes a +/– 5% change of the US-Dollar/Sterling exchange rate. 

The sensitivity analysis is based on the Group’s foreign currency financial instruments held at each balance sheet date.

If Sterling had strengthened against the US Dollar by 5% (2015: 5%) then this would have had the following impact:

(Loss)/profit after tax for the year

Equity

2016  

$’000

(661)

151

If Sterling had weakened against the US Dollar by 5% (2015: 5%) then this would have had the following impact:

(Loss)/profit after tax for the year

Equity

2016  

$’000

661

(151)

Exposures to foreign exchange rates vary during the year depending on the volume of overseas transactions. 
Nonetheless, the analysis above is considered to be representative of the Group’s exposure to currency risk.

2015  

$’000

(3)

(101)

2015  

$’000

3

101

104

Financial Statements22 Risk management objectives and policies continued
Interest rate sensitivity
The Group’s policy is to minimise interest rate cash flow risk exposures on long-term financing, through interest rate 
swaps. A large part of longer-term borrowings are, therefore, usually at fixed rates.

At 31 December 2016, the Group is exposed to changes in market interest rates through its bank borrowings, which  
are subject to variable interest rates – see Note 19 for further information.

The following table illustrates the sensitivity of the profit after tax for the year and equity to a reasonably possible 
change in interest rates of +/–0.25%, with effect from the beginning of the year. These changes are considered to be 
reasonably possible based on observation of current market conditions. The calculations are based on the Group’s 
financial instruments held at each balance sheet date. All other variables are held constant.

A 0.25% increase in interest rates would have the following impact:

Profit after tax for the year

Equity

A 0.25% decrease in interest rates would have the following impact:

Profit after tax for the year

Equity

2016  

$’000

(78)

(78)

2015  

$’000

(108)

(108)

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

78

78

108

108

Credit risk analysis
The Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk is limited to the carrying amount of financial assets recognised at the 
balance sheet date, as summarised below:

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Derivative financial instruments

2016  

$’000

18,824

42,259

3,249

141

2015  

$’000

25,059

45,475

3,250

18

64,473

73,802

The Group’s credit risk is primarily attributable to its trade receivables. The amounts presented in the balance sheet are 
net of allowances for doubtful receivables, estimated by the Group’s management based on prior experience and their 
assessment of the current economic environment.

The Group continuously monitors defaults of customers and other counterparties, identified either individually or by 
group, and incorporates this information into its credit risk controls. Where available at reasonable cost, external credit 
ratings and/or reports on customers and other counterparties are obtained and used. The Group’s policy is to deal only 
with creditworthy counterparties.

The Group’s management considers that all the above financial assets that are not impaired for each of the reporting 
dates under review are of good credit quality, including those that are past due.

None of the Group’s financial assets are secured by collateral or other credit enhancements.

In respect of trade and other receivables, the Group is not exposed to any significant credit risk exposure to any  
single counterparty or any group of counterparties having similar characteristics. The credit risk for liquid funds and 
other short-term financial assets is limited, since the counterparties are reputable banks with high quality external  
credit ratings.

105

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

22 Risk management objectives and policies continued
Liquidity risk analysis
The Group manages its liquidity needs by carefully monitoring scheduled debt servicing payments for long-term 
financial liabilities as well as cash-outflows due in day-to-day business. Liquidity needs are monitored in various time 
bands, on a day-to-day and week-to-week basis.

The Group maintains cash and marketable securities to meet its liquidity requirements. Funding for long-term liquidity 
needs is additionally secured by an adequate amount of committed credit facilities.

The Group’s liabilities have contractual maturities which are summarised below:

31 December 2016

Bank loans

Trade payables

Other short term financial liabilities

Derivative financial instruments

Other payables

31 December 2015 (restated)

Bank loans

Trade payables

Other short term financial liabilities

Derivative financial instruments

Other payables

Within 6 
months 
$’000

6,294

43,423

16,295

94

–

Current

6 to 12 
months 
$’000

1,316

–

–

–

–

66,106

1,316

Within 6 
months 
$’000

5,016

49,856

13,860

10

–

68,742

Current

6 to 12 
months 
$’000

–

–

–

–

–

–

Non-Current

Over 5 
years
$’000

–

–

–

–

–

–

Non-Current

Over 5  
years  
$’000

–

–

–

–

–

–

1 to 5 
years 
$’000

80,148

–

–

–

3,407

83,555

1 to 5  
years  
$’000

87,696

–

–

–

99

87,795

106

Financial Statements22 Risk management objectives and policies continued
Summary of financial assets and liabilities by category
The carrying amounts of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities as recognised at the balance sheet date of the 
reporting periods under review may also be categorised as follows. See Note 1, significant accounting policies, covering 
financial assets, financial liabilities and derivative financial instruments and hedge accounting for explanations about 
how the category of instruments affects their subsequent measurement.

Current assets

Derivative financial instruments carried at fair value through profit and loss:

– Forward exchange contract

Derivative financial instruments designated as hedging instruments:

– Interest rate swap

Loans and receivables:

– Trade receivables

Other receivables

– Cash and cash equivalents

Non-current liabilities

Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost:

– Borrowings

Other payables

Current liabilities

Derivative financial instruments carried at fair value through profit and loss:

– Forward exchange contract

Derivative financial instruments designated as hedging instruments:

– Interest rate swap

Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost:

– Borrowings

– Trade payables

Other payables

Restated 
(Note 1) 
2015  

$’000

2016  

$’000

–

141

42,259

3,249

18,824

64,473

18

–

45,475

3,250

25,059

73,802

75,748 

79,562

3,407

79,155

99

79,661

94

– 

5,000

43,423

16,295

64,812

–

10

5,000

49,856

13,860

68,726

Capital risk management
The Group manages its capital to ensure that entities in the Group will be able to continue as going concerns while 
maximising the return to shareholders through an optimal balance of debt and equity. The capital structure of the Group 
consists of debt, which includes the borrowings (Note 19), cash and cash equivalents (Note 18) and equity attributable 
to equity holders of the parent (Notes 24 and 25), comprising share capital and reserves as disclosed in the 
consolidated statement of changes in equity on page 81.

The Board reviews the capital structure, including the level of indebtedness and interest cover, as required. The Board’s 
objective is to maintain the optimal level of indebtedness and manage interest cover to comply with the covenant 
requirements set out in Note 19. As part of this review, the Board considers the cost of capital and the risks associated 
with each class of capital. Details of the level of indebtedness, in the form of net debt to EBITDA, and interest cover are 
given in Note 19, including a comparison with the covenants under the Group’s financing facilities.

107

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

23 Other Financial Assets/Liabilities
In the reporting periods under review, other financial assets/liabilities comprise derivative financial instruments as follows: 

Current financial assets

Derivative financial assets – forward exchange contracts

Derivative financial instruments – interest rate swaps 

Total

Current financial liabilities

Derivative financial liabilities – forward exchange contracts

Derivative financial instruments – interest rate swaps 

Total

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

2014  

$’000

–

141

141

(94)

–

(94)

18

–

18

–

(10)

(10)

–

–

–

(67)

–

(67)

The Group’s activities expose it primarily to the financial risks of changes in foreign currency exchange rates and interest rates. 
The Group uses exchange rate swaps to hedge exchange rate exposures and interest rate swap contracts to hedge the interest 
rate exposures. The Group does not use derivative financial instruments for speculative purposes. All interest rate swaps have 
been designated as hedging instruments in cash flow hedges in accordance with IAS 39. 

The Group’s interest rate swaps have been designated to match the corresponding loan terms to maximise the effectiveness of 
the hedging instrument. There was no ineffectiveness during the year and all movements were recorded in other comprehensive 
income, with amounts reclassified to finance costs within profit or loss. Exchange rate swaps are not treated as hedging 
instruments for hedge accounting purposes. 

The following table details the principal amounts and the remaining terms of interest rate swap contracts outstanding at the 
reporting date: 

2016  
%

2015  
%

2014  
%

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

2014  

$’000

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

2014  

$’000

Within one year

Within one to two years

Within two to five years

2.8

3.1

2.7

3.1

3.5

3.8

–

–

–

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

30,000

30,000

–

–

–

–

(175)

(505)

(714)

(134)

(384)

(674)

(317)

–

–

(1,394)

(1,192)

(317)

24 Share Capital

Authorised

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

2014  

$’000

28 million shares (2015: 28 million shares) of common stock of par value  
of US$0.10 each 

2,800 

2,800 

2,800 

Allotted, called up and fully paid:

20,444,550 (2014: 20,444,550) shares of common stock of par value  
of US$0.10 each

2,045 

 2,045

 2,045

The Company has one class of common stock which carries no right to fixed income.

108

Financial Statements25 Retained earnings and other reserves
Hedging reserve
The hedging reserve comprises the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash flow hedging 
instruments related to hedged transactions.

Translation reserve
The translation reserve comprises all foreign exchange differences arising from the translation of the closing balance 
sheets of foreign operations of the Group and the results of foreign operations of the Group since 1 January 2004.

Treasury stock 
Treasury stock represents the Group’s purchase of its own shares. During the year, 666,666 of the treasury stock was 
used to settle the obligations under the 2014 PSP plan and the remainder was sold. At 31 December 2015, the Group 
owned 747,821 shares, representing 3.7% of its shares of common stock.

26 Dividends

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the period: Interim 
dividend for the year ended 31 December 2016 of 5.13c/3.35p (2015: 5.13c/3.35p) 
per share

Final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2015 of 8.17c/4.95p (2014: 
8.17c/4.95p) per share

Proposed final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2016 of 9.87c/7.95p  
(2015: 9.41c/6.15p) per share

2016  

$’000

1,049

2015  

$’000

1,010 

2014  

$’000

1,089

1,853

1,492 

1,478

2,902 

2,018

2,502 

1,853 

2,567

1,521

The Quarto Group, Inc., as a US incorporated company, is required to collect US dividend withholding taxes on dividend 
distributions made to its non-US shareholders. The US dividend withholding tax is generally 30% of any dividends paid 
to Quarto’s non-US shareholders, but this amount can potentially be reduced pursuant to an applicable income tax 
treaty between the US and the country of residence of the non-US shareholder.

For example, under the US/UK income tax treaty, the US dividend withholding tax rate can range from nil (applicable  
to certain UK resident pension trusts and tax exempt entities) to 15% (applicable to UK resident individual shareholders 
and certain UK corporate shareholders). For US shareholders, no US dividend withholding tax is generally applicable.  
It should be noted that certain documentation requirements must be met by all shareholders prior to the payment of 
any dividends to certify their status as a US or non-US shareholder, and, if a non-US shareholder to claim any applicable 
benefits under the US/ UK or other applicable income tax treaty. Each shareholder should consult their own tax adviser 
to determine whether and to what extent they may be entitled to claim a reduced amount of US dividend withholding 
taxes under a US income tax treaty.

27 Notes to the cash flow statement
Cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits. Cash equivalents are short-term highly liquid investments that  
are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and which are subject to insignificant changes in value.

109

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

28 Share based payments
Performance Share Plan (‘PSP’)
The Company operates a PSP scheme that awards free shares.

2014 award
The awards under this scheme were granted on 22 May 2014 and vest on 30 June 2016. Vesting is conditional on  
the average share price being equal to or greater than £2.50 over any consecutive period of 90 days during the 
performance period, adjusted for dividends and other cash distributions paid, where the minimum value of such 
dividends and other cash distributions paid is no less than £2.25p per share. Participants are entitled to receive  
dividend equivalents over the vesting period of the awards, which are payable on vesting.

For the year ended 31 December 2014 the awards under this scheme were valued at $nil as the performance criteria 
were not expected to be met.

During the year ended 31 December 2015 the performance criteria was amended such that vesting is only conditional 
on the average share price being equal to or greater than £2.50 over any consecutive period of 90 days during the 
performance period. Following this change, the fair value of the award was reassessed at $226,000.

This award was exercised on 9 August 2016 by the Chief Executive Officer Marcus Leaver. Full details are set out in the 
Remuneration Report on page 55. The share price on 9 August 2016 was £2.64.

Outstanding at beginning of the year

Exercised during the period

Outstanding at the end of the year

Share price at date of grant

Expected life (years)

Fair value per award

Weighted average remaining contractual life

Dividend yield

Expected volatility of share price (%)

Model used

2016 
Number

2015 
Number

666,666 

666,666 

(666,666)

– 

– 

666,666 

£1.70

2.1

£0.23

0.50

n/a

16.6

Monte-Carlo

2015 award
The awards under this scheme were granted on 24 September 2015. The vesting period is four years from the date  
of grant. The award vests in the following proportion:

•  50% is conditional on the cumulative growth in Adjusted Diluted EPS being between 5% and 10% over the 

performance period, resulting in the awards vesting on a sliding scale of 20% to 100%; and

•  50% is conditional on Total Shareholder Return being between 7% and 15%, resulting in vesting on a sliding scale  

of 20% to 100%.

Participants are not entitled to receive dividends until awards have vested.

Details of the share options outstanding during the year are as follows.

Outstanding at beginning of the year

Granted during the year

Outstanding at the end of the year

2016 
Number

143,732 

83,732

227,464 

2015 
Number

–

143,732 

143,732 

110

Financial Statements28 Share based payments continued
The key inputs used to value the options are:

Share price at date of grant

Expected life (years)

Fair value per award

Weighted average remaining contractual life (years)

Dividend yield (%)

Expected volatility of share price (%)

Model used

EPS Portion TSR Portion

£2.09

4.0

£1.78

3.0

3.97

n/a

£2.09

4.0

£1.07

3.0

3.97

19

Dividend discount Monte-Carlo

2016 award
The awards under this scheme were granted on 19 April 2016. The vesting period is four years from the date of grant. 
The award vests in the following proportion:

•  50% is conditional on the cumulative growth in Adjusted Diluted EPS being between 5% and 10% over the 

performance period, resulting in the awards vesting on a sliding scale of 20% to 100%; and

•  50% is conditional on Total Shareholder Return being between 7% and 15%, resulting in vesting on a sliding scale  

of 20% to 100%.

Participants are not entitled to receive dividends until awards have vested.

Details of the share options outstanding during the year are as follows.

Outstanding at beginning of the year

Granted during the year

Outstanding at the end of the year

The key inputs used to value the options are:

Share price at date of grant

Expected life (years)

Fair value per award

Weighted average remaining contractual life (years)

Dividend yield (%)

Expected volatility of share price (%)

Model used

2016 
Number

–

366,728 

366,728 

EPS Portion TSR Portion

£2.45

4.0

£2.10

3.3

3.88

n/a

£2.45

4.0

£0.44

3.3

3.88

19.1

Dividend discount Monte-Carlo

111

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

29 Operating lease commitments

Lease payments under operating leases recognised in income for the year

2016  

$’000

2,264

2015  

$’000

2,153

At the balance sheet date, the Group had outstanding commitments for future minimum lease payments under non-
cancellable operating leases, which fall due as follows:

Minimum lease payments under operating leases within one year

In the second to fifth years inclusive

After more than five years

2016  

$’000

1,679 

4,805 

4,427 

10,911

2015  

$’000

1,915

3,836

2,399

8,150

Operating lease payments represent rentals payable by the Group, primarily for its office properties. There were no 
capital commitments amounting at the year end (2015: $nil).

30 Acquisitions
becker&mayer
On 8 August 2016, the Group acquired the publishing business and net assets of becker&mayer LLC (‘becker&mayer’) 
through its US subsidiary Quarto Publishing Group USA Inc, for a consideration of $9.8m, together with a working 
capital adjustment payment capped at $1.0m and further deferred contingent consideration of up to $1.0m. 
Consideration of $2.3m was paid on completion. A further $2.5m was paid in January 2017 and the remaining balance 
is payable in separate tranches over the next three years. The fair value of the deferred contingent consideration was 
estimated based on the Group’s expectation of the future performance of the business, discounted to reflect the timing 
of the expected payments.

If the acquisition had been completed on the first day of the financial year, Group revenue for the year would have  
been $197.9m and Group loss for the year would have been $6.1m. The revenue and operating profit of becker&mayer 
since the date of acquisition included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income are $11.4m and $1.9m 
respectively. 

Harvard Common Press
On 1 February 2016, the Group acquired selected assets of the publishing business of The Harvard Common Press 
through its US subsidiary Quarto Publishing Group USA Inc, for a consideration of $1.0m. Of the consideration $0.1m 
was paid during the year ended 31 December 2015, a further $0.1m was paid on completion of the acquisition and 
$0.4m was paid in July 2016. The final payment of $0.4m was made in January 2017.

The revenue and operating profit of The Harvard Common Press since the date of acquisition included the consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income is $1.3m and $0.4m respectively. There would be no difference in these results had 
the acquisition completed on the first day of the financial year. 

These companies were acquired because of their strategic fit within the Group. The transaction costs of $191,000 were 
incurred in relation to the acquisition. The transactions have been accounted for under the acquisition method. The 
goodwill arising on these acquisitions is largely attributable to the anticipated incremental sales and cost synergies 
achievable as part of The Quarto Group and is expected to be deductible for tax purposes.

Burgess Lea Press
On 25 May 2016, the Group acquired the publishing business of Burgess Lea Press and recognised intangible backlist 
assets of $128,000.

112

Financial Statements30 Acquisitions continued
The fair value of acquired assets and liabilities is summarised below.

Intangible assets – pre-publication costs

Other intangible assets – backlists

Property, plant and equipment

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Trade and other payables

Net assets acquired

Goodwill

Total consideration paid (including deferred consideration)

Net cash outflow arising on acquisition

Satisfied by:

Cash

Loan notes

Contingent consideration arrangements

Total

Net cash outflow arising on acquisition

Cash consideration

becker&mayer

Harvard 
Common Press

Fair values 
$’000

Fair values 
$’000

564

2,415 

259 

2,461 

6,340

(3,225)

8,814

2,332

11,146

2,300

7,319

1,527

11,146

–

436 

– 

297 

79

(551)

261

773

1,034

230

804

– 

1,034

2,300

502

The goodwill for becker&mayer is provisional using an estimate of fair value and will be reviewed and adjusted in the 
next eight months as necessary.

31 Subsequent events
On 30 March 2017, the Group completed the disposal of its 75% interest in Regent Publishing Services Ltd, its Hong 
Kong based publishing services business. The consideration for the disposal was $7.0m including a payment of $2.5m 
(HK$19.5m) for the group’s share of the excess cash in the business, payable in cash on completion. The business was 
sold to 1010 Printing Group Ltd, a Hong Kong based printing business listed on the Hong Kong Stock Exchange. The 
consideration will be used to reduce the Group’s net debt. For the 12 months ended 31 December 2016, Regent 
Publishing Services Ltd recorded a profit before tax of $1.6m and had net assets of $6.6m. 

On 3 April 2017, the Group completed the disposal of BGD Australia which has been acquired by Zooom Pty Limited (as 
trustee for the Zooom Investment Trust), a company incorporated in Australia and formed for the purposes of acquiring 
the business by a group comprising certain of the master franchisees and former employees of the business in Australia. 
The consideration for the sale of the company was A$1 and Quarto will also take an assignment of certain debts owed 
by the master franchisees to BGD Australia of A$1.9m (US$1.4m) which are repayable in monthly instalments over two 
years and are interest bearing. The repayments will be used to reduce the Group’s bank debt as they are received. 
Quarto is entitled to receive 10% of the profit before interest and tax of Zooom Pty Limited for the next five years. 

113

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

32 Alternative performance measures
The Group uses alternative performance measures to explain and judge its performance.

Adjusted operating profit is operating profit excluding amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional items. The 
Directors consider this to be a useful measure of the Group operating performance as it approximates the underlying operating 
cash flow.

Exceptional items are those which the Company defines as significant non-recurring items outside the scope of normal 
business that need to be disclosed by virtue of their size or incidence in order for the user to obtain a proper understanding  
of the financial information.

Backlist % of sales refers to book titles that were published in previous calendar years and is a key measure of the performance  
of our intellectual property assets.

Intellectual property development spend refers to the amounts spent annually on the creation and publication of book titles 
against which we monitor subsequent sales (see Note 15).

Inventory % of revenue is the book value of inventory divided by total revenue for the year. Inventory turn is cost of sales 
divided by book value of inventory and measures the number of times inventory is sold through the business in a year.

Product efficiency is the ratio of new title revenue to intellectual property spend in the previous year and is an indicator 
of the reliability of our back list sales.

Return on net operating assets is the ratio of adjusted operating profit to net operating assets and is used to evaluate 
the long term financial performance of the Group,

114

Financial Statements32 Alternative performance measures continued

Adjusted Operating Profit

Operating profit

Add back: – Amortisation of acquired intangibles

– Other exceptional items (Note 5)

Adjusted operating profit

Add/(deduct): Books & Gifts Direct operating (loss)/profit

Adjusted operating profit (excluding Books & Gifts Direct)

EBITDA

Adjusted profit before tax (before amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional items)

Net interest

Depreciation

EBITDA, before exceptional items

Amortisation of pre-publication costs

Restated
(Note 1) 
2015  

$’000

2016  

$’000

1,659

705

6,397

8,761

9,817

18,578

13,813

2,945

1,080

17,838

17,244

15,306

724

445

16,475

(882)

15,593

13,377

3,098

1,189

17,664

18,184

EBITDA (as defined in the committed facility agreement)

35,082

35,848

Net debt

Short term borrowings

Medium and long term borrowings

Cash and cash equivalents

Net operating assets

Net assets

Unallocated segment assets

Unallocated segment liabilities

Return on net operating assets

Adjusted dividend cover (excluding BGD)

Adjusted basic earnings per share (cents)

Total dividend for the year (cents)

Dividend cover (times)

115

5,000

75,748

5,000

79,562

(18,824)

(25,059)

61,924

59,503

44,111

53,444

(20,987)

(25,077)

95,405

118,529

7.4%

94,587

122,954

13.4%

54.7

15.0

3.6

46.0

14.5

3.2

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016COMPANY BALANCE SHEET

AS AT 31 DECEMBER 2016

Fixed Assets

Investments

Current liabilities

Creditors: Amounts falling due within one year

Net liabilities

Equity

Called up share capital

Treasury stock

Reserves  – Paid in surplus

– Profit and loss

Total equity

Notes

2016  

$’000

2015  

$’000

4

6

7

4,080

4,080

8,444

8,444

(21,962)

(20,992)

(21,962)

(20,992)

(17,882)

(12,548)

2,045

–

2,045

(634)

33,764

33,764

(53,691)

(47,723)

(17,882)

(12,548)

The Company reported a loss for the year of $4.4m (2015: $3.8m).

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 19 April 2017.  
They were signed on its behalf by:

Marcus E. Leaver
Director

116

Financial StatementsCOMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2016

Balance at 1 January 2015

Loss for the year

Other comprehensive income

Foreign exchange translation differences

Total comprehensive income for the year

Transactions with owners

Dividends to shareholders

Share based payments charges

Balance at 31 December 2015

Loss for the year

Other comprehensive income

Foreign exchange translation differences

Total comprehensive income for the year

Transactions with owners

Dividends to shareholders

Share based payments charges

Shares released/sold from treasury

Balance at 31 December 2016

Share capital 
$’000

2,045

Paid in 
surplus 
$’000

33,764

Treasury 
stock  
$’000

Retained 
earnings 
$’000

(634)

(42,680)

Equity 
attributable 
to owners 
$’000

(7,505)

(3,802)

1,075

1,075

(3,802)

1,075

1,075

(2,502)

(2,502)

186

186

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2,045

33,764

(634)

(47,723)

(12,548)

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2,045

33,764

–

–

–

–

– 

634

–

(4,428)

(4,428)

2,265

2,265

2,265

2,265

(2,902)

(2,902)

256

(1,159)

256

(525) 

(53,692)

(17,882)

117

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE COMPANY BALANCE SHEET 

AT 31 DECEMBER 2016

1 Basis of preparation
The separate financial statements of the Company are presented and have been prepared in accordance with Financial 
Reporting Standard 102 (FRS 102) issued by the Financial Reporting Council. These financial statements present 
information for the Company, not about its Group, which is presented on pages 78 to 115.

The financial statements have been prepared in accordance with applicable accounting standards and under the 
historical cost accounting rules modified to include certain items as fair value and in accordance with FRS 102. The 
financial statements have been prepared using the going concern basis, as discussed in the Group going concern 
disclosure on page 84.

2 Accounting policies
The following accounting policies have been applied consistently in dealing with items which are considered material  
in relation to the financial statements. The functional currency of the company is Pounds Sterling, with the parent 
company accounts presented in US Dollars.

Investments
Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less, where appropriate, provisions for impairment.

Creditors
Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings are initially recognised at fair value, and subsequently measured at 
amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Share-based payments
The Group issues equity settled share-based payments to certain employees. Equity settled share-based payments are 
measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value, determined at the grant date, of equity settled share–based 
payments is expensed on a straight line basis over the vesting period, based on the Group’s estimate of shares that will 
eventually vest. The fair value of employee share option grants is calculated using a Monte Carlo model, taking into 
account the terms and conditions upon which the options were granted. The value of the charge is adjusted to reflect 
expected and actual levels of options vesting. Further detail is set out in Note 28.

Cash and cash equivalents
There were no cash transactions during the year and accordingly no cash flow statement has been presented.

Foreign currencies
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated at the foreign exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. 
Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at the balance sheet date are translated at the 
exchange rate ruling at that date with any exchange differences arising on retranslation being recognised in the income 
statement. The assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on 
consolidation, are translated into US Dollars at exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. The revenues and 
expenses of foreign operations are translated into US Dollars at average annual exchange rates. Foreign exchange 
differences arising on retranslation are charged or credited to other comprehensive income and are recognised in the 
currency translation reserve in equity. On disposal of a foreign operation, the related cumulative translation differences 
recognised in equity are reclassified to profit or loss and are recognised as part of the gain or loss on disposal.

Financial guarantee contracts
Where the Company enters into financial guarantee contracts to guarantee the indebtedness of other companies within 
its group, the Company considers these to be insurance arrangements, and accounts for them as such. In this respect, 
the Company treats the guarantee contract as a contingent liability until such time as it becomes probable that the 
Company will be required to make a payment under the guarantee.

3 Loss attributable to the Company
The loss for the financial year dealt with in the financial statements of the parent company was $4.4m (2015: $3.8m). 
No separate profit and loss account is presented in respect of the parent company as permitted by section 408 of the 
Companies Act 2006.

118

Financial Statements4 Investments

At 1 January

Amounts written off during year

At 31 December

2016  

$’000

8,444

(4,364)

4,080

2015  

$’000

12,060

(3,616)

8,444

The write-off in the year relates to the Company’s investment in Books & Gifts Directly Limited, a New Zealand company.

5 Subsidiaries
a) Trading companies

Incorporation

Name

Place

Date

Registered 
address key†

Issued and fully paid 
up share capital

% held Segment

Books & Gifts 
Direct (Pty) Limited

Books & Gifts 
Direct Limited

Quarto Publishing 
plc

Australia 

3 December 1990

D

New Zealand 

27 September 1996 C

United Kingdom 

1 April 1976

Quarto, Inc.

Delaware, USA 

16 October 1986

RotoVision S.A.

Switzerland 

18 July 1977

Global Book 
Publishing Pty. 
Limited

Apple Press 
Limited

Small World 
Creations Limited

Lewes Holdings 
Limited

Aurum Press 
Limited

Australia 

4 November 1999

United Kingdom  5 June 1984

United Kingdom  20 September 1997 A

United Kingdom  21 July 2005

United Kingdom  31 May 1977

Quarto (JS) LLP

United Kingdom  6 November 1998

Frances Lincoln 
Limited

Quarto Australia 
(Pty) Limited

Quarto Publishing 
Group USA Inc.

Regent Publishing 
Services Limited

United Kingdom 

15 December 1980

Australia

14 September 1981

Delaware, USA 

28 June 2004

Hong Kong 

23 October 1985

A

B

F

D

A

A

A

A

A

D

B

E

100,004 shares 
of A$1 each

400,000 shares 
of NZ$1 each

100,000 shares 
of £1 each

86 shares 
of no par value

1,500 shares 
of SFr500 each

1,000 shares 
of A$1 each

100 shares 
of £1 each

1,536 share 
of £1 each

20,840 shares 
of £0.01 each

382,502 shares 
of £1 each

100 units

565,000 shares 
of 10p each

110 shares 
of A$1 each

380 shares 
of US$0.01 each

1,000 shares 
of HK$10 each

100

100*#

100*

100*

100*

100*

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Books & Gifts Direct, 
ANZ

Books & Gifts Direct, 
ANZ

Quarto International 
Co-Editions Group

Quarto International 
Co-Editions Group

Quarto International 
Co-Editions Group

Quarto International 
Co-Editions Group

Quarto International 
Co-Editions Group

Quarto International 
Co-Editions Group

Quarto International 
Co-Editions Group

Quarto Publishing 
Group UK

Quarto Publishing 
Group UK

Quarto Publishing 
Group UK

Quarto International 
Co-Editions Group

Quarto Publishing 
Group USA

75#

Quarto HK

†  See Note 5c on page 120.
*  Directly held by The Quarto Group, Inc.
#  The shares held in this company were sold after the year end. See Note 30 for further details.

119

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016NOTES TO THE COMPANY BALANCE SHEET AT 31 DECEMBER 2016 CONTINUED

5 Subsidiaries continued
b) Dormant companies

Incorporation

Name

Place

Date

Registered 
address key† Issued share capital

% held

AP Screen Printers Limited

United Kingdom 30 September 1980 A

1,000 shares of £1 each

Cartographica Press Limited

United Kingdom 27 July 1981

Design Eye Holdings Limited

United Kingdom 22 June 1992

Design Eye Limited

United Kingdom 18 March 1988

Design Eye Publishing Limited

United Kingdom 17 June 1992

Fine Wine Editions Limited

United Kingdom 23 June 1949

Frances Lincoln Publishers Limited United Kingdom 11 March 1987

Great American Trading Company 
Limited (THE)

United Kingdom 24 February 1982

Global Book Publishing Pty Limited United Kingdom 7 July 1986

IQON Editions Limited

United Kingdom 5 December 1972

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

1,000 shares of £1 each

200 shares of £1 each

100 shares of £1 each

2 shares of £1 each

9,020 shares of £1 each

100 shares of £1 each

100 shares of £1 each

1,000 shares of £1 each

300 shares of £1 each

iqu-digital.com Limited

United Kingdom 30 November 1978 A

100 shares of £1 each

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

JR Books Limited

United Kingdom 9 September 1986

Marshall Editions Limited

United Kingdom 7 February 2002

Marshall Publishing Limited

United Kingdom 7 February 2002

Quarto Magazines Limited

United Kingdom 20 May 1986

Quarto Children’s Books Limited

United Kingdom 6 January 1976

QED Publishing Limited

United Kingdom 12 November 1974

Quantum Books Limited

United Kingdom 7 February 1983

Quarto Multi-Media Limited

United Kingdom 14 December 1984

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

43,004 shares of £1 each 100

1 shares of £1 each

1 shares of £1 each

1,000 shares of £1 each

2 shares of £1 each

400 shares of £1 each

100 shares of £1 each

1,000 shares of £1 each

QU:ID Publishing Limited

United Kingdom 30 September 1980 A

100 shares of £1 each

Quill Publishing Limited

United Kingdom 14 May 1979

Quintessence Editions Limited

United Kingdom 7 February 2002

Quintet Publishing Limited

United Kingdom 14 May 1979

QEB Publishing Limited

Delaware, USA

27 April 2004

Quarto Media Inc

Delaware, USA

10 December 2010

Quarto Marketing Inc

Delaware, USA

26 April 1995

A

A

A

B

B

B

EYE Quarto Inc

Delaware, USA

19 December 2002

B

1,000 shares of £1 each

1 shares of £1 each

100 shares of £1 each

1,500 shares  
of no par value

1,000 shares of $1 each

3,000 shares  
of no par value

1,000 shares  
of no par value

†  See Note 5c below.

c) List of registered offices
A  The Old Brewery, 6 Blundell Street, London, N7 9BH, United Kingdom 
B  400 First Avenue North, Minneapolis, MN 55401, USA 
C 
D  c/o ZM Partners, Suite 10 Ground Floor, 123 Clarence Street, Sydney, NSW 2000, Australia  
E  Unit B & C, 7th Floor, Genisi, No. 33-35 Wong Chuk Hand Road, Hong Kong 
F  Passage Perdonet 1, 1005 Lausanne, Switzerland

135b Morrin Road, Saint Johns, Auckland, 1072, New Zealand 

120

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Financial Statements6 Creditors: Amounts falling due within one year

Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings

2016  

$’000

21,962

2015  

$’000

20,992

7 Called up share capital and treasury stock
Details of called up share capital and treasury stock are set out in Notes 24 to 25 of the consolidated  
financial statements.

8 Contingent liabilities
The Quarto Group, Inc. has issued guarantees in respect of bank loans of subsidiaries of $80,748,000 (2015: 
$84,562,000). Refer to Note 19 of the consolidated financial statements.

9 Related parties
The company borrowed an amount of $3,236,000 from its wholly owned subsidiary, Quarto Publishing plc, during  
the year (2015: $2,511,000 borrowed in the year). The balance on the loan at 31 December 2016 was $15,471,000 
(2015: $14,995,000). These balances are non-interest bearing and repayable on demand.

121

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016FIVE YEAR SUMMARY

Results

Revenue

Operating profit before amortisation of acquired 
intangibles and exceptional items

Operating profit

Profit before tax, amortisation of acquired intangible 
assets and exceptional items

(Loss)/profit before tax

(Loss)/profit after tax

Assets employed

Non-current assets

Current assets

Current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Net assets

Financed by

Equity

Non-controlling interests

Earnings per share (cents)

Basic

Diluted

Adjusted basic

Adjusted diluted

2016  

$’000

2015* 

$’000

2014#
$’000

2013#
$’000

2012#
$’000

188,434

8,761

1,659

5,816

(1,286)

(5,277)

182,165

16,475

15,306

13,377

12,208

8,523

171,339

14,927

14,990

10,950

11,013

8,091

175,481

14,565

10,726

9,294

5,455

3,761

180,632

14,986

12,962

9,034

7,010

5,124

105,507

104,433

97,133

107,413

102,416

98,709

102,364

97,907

106,537

106,157

(68,872)

(89,657)

(71,275)

(144,918)

(70,485)

(67,002)

(87,127)

(6,464)

(83,776)

(98,019)

44,111

53,444

49,743

46,010

47,673

39,219

4,892

44,111

(28.5)

(28.5)

5.7

5.6

48,285

5,159

53,444

44,802

4,941

49,743

41,201

4,809

46,010

41.3

41.2

46.2

46.1

39.5

39.5

39.1

39.1

17.0

17.0

36.1

36.1

40,726

6,947

47,673

23.9

23.9

41.6

41.6

*  Restated as per Note 1. 
#  The 2014 closing balance sheet restatement was all corrected through the 2014 results as it was impractical to determine the impact on 

these earlier individual financial years and it is not expected to result in a material change to these years.

122

Financial StatementsOFFICERS & PROFESSIONAL ADVISERS

Directors
Peter Read*, Chairman
Marcus Leaver, Chief Executive
Michael Connole, FCA, Chief Financial Officer 
Michael Hartley*
Jess Burley*

Registrars and transfer office
Capita Asset Services
The Registry
34 Beckenham Road
Beckenham
Kent BR3 4TU

Principal banks
Bank of America Corporation
100 Federal Street
Boston MA 02110 USA

Fifth Third Bank
38 Fountain Square Plaza
MD 109055 Cincinatti
OH 45263 USA

Santander UK plc
4th Floor Santander House
100 Ludgate Hill
London EC4M 7RE

The Royal Bank of Scotland plc
280 Bishopsgate
London EC2M 4RB

Company Registration Number
FC0 13814

*  Non-executive

Secretary
Anne Crompton

Principal office
The Old Brewery 
6 Blundell Street
London N7 9BH
Tel: +44 (0) 7700 6700

Stockbrokers
Stockdale Securities Limited
Beaufort House
15 St Botolph Street
London EC3A 7BB

Liberum Capital Limited
Ropemaker Place, Level 12
25 Ropemaker Street
London EC2Y 9LY

Auditor
Deloitte LLP
2 New Street Square
London EC4A 3BZ

Solicitor
Olswang LLP
90 High Holborn
London WC1V 6XX

123

STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSGOVERNANCEQuarto Group, Inc. Annual Report 2016The Old Brewery
6 Blundell Street
London N7 9BH
United Kingdom

Tel: +44 (0)20 7700 6700
Fax: +44 (0)20 7700 8066
Email: info@quarto.com

ATLAS
ATLAS
FÖR
ÄVENTYRARE
ÄVENTYRARE
DJUREN I VÄRLDEN

En samling av naturens mest 
SPEKTAKULÄRA HÄNDELSER, MÄKTIGA 
MIGRATIONER och SÄLLSAMMA 
BETEENDEN

Illustrerad av Lucy Letherland
Text av Rachel Williams 
och Emily Hawkins

Möt några av naturens 
mest äventyrliga djur på 
denna upptäcktsfärd  
i naturens värld.

Utforska SJU VÄRLDSDELSKARTOR och lär känna djur  
som lever och överlever på spektakulära vis genom årets  
alla växlingar. I den här boken får du färdas med NARVALAR  
på deras riskfyllda turer i jakt på mat under isen, uppfostra  
ORANGUTANGUNGAR i Borneo, klättra i bergen med  
Kinas JÄTTEPANDOR och uppleva många andra  
mäktiga DJURÄVENTYR från jordens alla hörn. 

Här finns fler än 30 spännande djur, så unga 
naturäventyrare kan upptäcka hundratals roliga 
saker och nya fakta på varje sida i boken.

I
l
l

u
s
t
r
e
r
a
d
a
v

L
u
c
y
L
e
t
h
e
r
l
a
n
d

ISBN 978-91-7663-173-7

9 7 8 9 1 7 6 6 3 1 7 3 7 >

Atlas of Animals_CVR_SWE.indd   1

2016-09-21   11:22

T

h

e

Q

u

a

r

t

o

G

r

o

u

p

,

I

n

c

.

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

6